The New Testament and Its Writers

T H E G U ILD LIBRARY

All the manu als are ﬁn e example s of c areful workmans hi p an d sob olarly " mi ” n u r . In e e n en an d N onconfor s t i 7th u u 1 896 . i d st y d p d t , A g st A series orwhi ch we have often spoken in terms of very high commenda " ”

1 th M rch 1898 . on . Recor 1 ti d , a

Me od T me 25th u u 1898 . mo dmir e er e . A st a abl s i s th ist i s , A g st e n e L er r No more b eautiful s erie s of the kin d pass s un d er our otic . it a y "

Wor 21 s t c o er 1898 . ld , O t b Ma Thi h e ed er e . G ow Her 1899 . s appily d vis s i s lasg ald , y

ND 0. BL C . LO ON : A. A K

L R L . R. C E EDIN BURGH : R. 8: A K , IMIT D

H AR E D f. R S D . L L D Pro . . . E n d b Ve r Rev . d E dite y y C T I , , , i ‘

D . A M C LYMO NT D . rd n A . ee . nd Re . . a v J , , be

P r eo E dition rice 1 3. 6d. n et Co ies ma be had C own 8 , . p y i n rl a ved r d e ra xt . te e fo 8 .

o N w R e a dy . S RIT E RS O F E A R E L IG IO U W N G L N D . ‘ M I D D Gl PE R R . . o B Rev. . y A SON M ADA MU , , asg w ‘ r M Adam Mu r has r en c o r ook in e h r c and D . i w itt a s h la ly b a styl t at will att a t — n re he u en o f en er and re o u er ure ke . Scots m n i te st t st d t g al ligi s lit at ali a . ” mir e — S ec a i r en i t tor. The spi rit in which it s w itt s ad abl . p

f irs t ﬁ eries . R E L G O S O F T H E W O RL D I I N . ’

D. L. . ueen n er Princ l GRAN T D. L U n d B C . y ipa , , D " s iv sity, a a a

2 9mThous and .

H e e n b e e r and c e rer e -b o k — W o m ee o . Bri tis h eekl av s ld s a tt l a t xt y. H AN D B O O K O F C H R S A E V D E C E S I TI N I N . B n f Pr c W R . Un r o T E T D. e dre . n w . y i ipal S A , D , iv sity St A s 2 8 h T o sand t h u . Fo r its o wn p u rpo se there is no b oo k that can fo r a mo ment co mpete with — Ex ositor Tu nes it. p y . T H E N E W T E S AM A N D I T S T E NT W R IT E R S . ‘ B M M N D Re v. . C LY O T . D . . erdeen . y J A , , Ab 39th s Tho u and .

It s u p plies exc ellently te rse and clea r intro d uctio ns to the bo o ks o f the N e w m — rd T en Gua ia n . esta t. TH E O L D E STAM E T A N D I T S C O T E S T N N NT .

B Pro fe r E R U e o f G D. n r o R T D. o w y ss OB SON , , iv sity lasg . 2 8m Th usa nd o .

It c o n a n the o f b r r e and re en its m e e rn n in t i s pith li a i s , p s ts assiv l a i g a lucid and rea b e — v e M n e . E an lical da l styl g agazi e. T H E G UILD LIBRARY

L A DMA RKS O F C H RC H N U H ISTO RY.

B Pr fes o r C W o . D. Un e o f e r rdee . y s O AN , D , iv sity Ab n

2 3rd Thousa d n .

m r u D r. Co n has c o en his te c o u and s e em fo r u wa h s a ials j di i sly, t th th l cidly — s Gla ow H e d. and attrac tively . g ral

H S O R O F I T Y T H E C H UR C H O F SC O T L A N D . ‘ B Rev. P. M I R D D G o y M ADA MU , . . , lasg w .

2 2 n nd Thous a d.

T co m re en e um no u and n eres n c ure o f the ecc e c his p h siv , l i s, i t ti g pi t l siasti al ” f n w r W a a nd re en o Sc o Li te ar orld . p st p s t tla d . y

O U R L O RD ’S T E A H C ING .

B Re v . R D. n eh m . R E T . e y J OB SON , D , Whitti g a .

32nd Thous and .

As long as the Ch urch o f Sco tland ca n pro d uce manuals o f this calibre it need fe r m n a mmun i n r e — eeo d n co r o n co C n m . R r ot a pa is with y ity h ist d o .

T H E PR E SB YT E R IA N C H URC H E S T H E IR P LA C E A N D P O W E R IN M O D E R N C H R I T E M S N D O .

B Re v. . OG I LVI E . A. B n ore. y J . N , M , a gal

7th Tho usa nd .

“ Nowhe re is it possible to o btain in anything like the same co mpass s o clear and u o r a e an rr o f o r c f c and ecc e c c an d the a th it tiv a ay hist i al a ts l siasti al statisti s , f n b r an r — a r n e o e d e e S e ke . vol ume has the additional adva tag b i g ight adabl . p

ﬁ eco ne E eries .

H MA A FA ITH F UL C H UR C N . ME f P o o R E RT O D. o f the L e an d ork o r e r D . Ske tch if W f ss JA S OB S N , , F en em e o f the urc o f co nd oun de r o f the E ndowm t S ch C h h S tla .

D n er o f Ed n ur LL. U Pro f H RT E RI . D. . . B . C y A S , D , , iv sity i b gh

If any yo un g no velist wishes to tell again the ever- romantic story o f the ru e o f o o r Sco u en e cr e s o e c Geor e Mac st ggl s a p ttish s t d t, d s ib d path ti ally by g a and b mo re o u r uc ce or he ﬁn d o me u b e m er Do n ld y still p p la s ss s , will s val a l at ial ‘ in a little bo o k iss ue d in the Guild Library this week entitled A Faithful ’ — n Aberdeen Free Press . Churchma . T h boo k can be reco mmen e to oun C urc men o f all enom n on an d e d d y g h h d i ati s , k em c u n e n o t o n W ﬁne and c r c er e o f Sc o m n will ma e th a q ai t d ly ith a ha a t istic typ ts a , n an d mo emen s wln ch are n o ut of m n but c b u t also with e ve ts v t passi g i d , whi h — n Gla s ow Herald . have d one much to mo uld the p rese t . g 2 T H E G U ILD LIBRARY

TH E PRE PA RA TIO N FO R C H R IST IA NITY R L D IN T H E A NC IE NT W O . D il Ph . Se D. . WE N LE Y . B R. . y M , e f Senior Pro fes s or o f Philo sophy in the Un iv rsity o Michiga n .

“ re and o rou as e as c o r and um nou ur e o f the n o" A f sh vig s , w ll s h la ly l i s , s v y i t ec u co n o n c re e un er Greek c u ure Ro m n u ho r a nd l t al diti s whi h p vail d d lt , a a t ity , - u n S eaker. J ewish excl sive ess . p T H E MISS IO NA RY E XPA N S IO N T H E R E FO RME D C H RC H E S O F U .

d o n r a t m . he Re . . G R H M . . Gu o n B t v. y J A A A , M A , il Missi a y Kali p g

With 8 Maps an d 1 4 5 Ill ustration s . T he mo st attractive sho rt manual Of missions generally that has yet been — Clm rch Miss o nar I n telli ence. published . i y g We ma is en r c e 240 u r on mo o r r co n n y add that it i h d by ill st ati s , stly p t aits , tai s ’ ' r — 1 w A e 8 m and e o r o f refe ence . he Ne . aps , giv s a bibli g aphy s g A D M H YMNS N H Y N MA KE R S .

h e . r D Ed n u . B t e R DUN AN MP E LL B . v C C . y A B , , i b gh

d E dition Secon .

The e o f the o o k is o e er c rm n and the n ro uc o n is as lue ul styl b alt g th ha i g, i t d ti " m e c o n — nd ra ce u l as is c c a d en e r n . Aberdeen Fr e P ss a e re . g f it sy path ti , ath li , p t ati g a e n t m ro o ne or f r re - u We o co e c o o u e . rd h v a ss w d bias p j dic G a ia n . L MA E R A N D M B IB E NN S C UST O S .

K E GE RG E MAO I D. Be l us o B the e . R v . D . ro ut. tr t n y O M , , y With I l a i s .

7ih Thousand.

It will help readers o f the B ible m uch as a dictionary of classical antiq uities

- r er o f L n and Greek . Scotsma n helps a ead ati . To the teacher who wishes to give local colo ur and piq uan cy to his Bible- class e on o r o the u en who e re to un er t n his B e mo re orou l ss s , t st d t d si s d s a d ibl th ghly , b x en h n o k be un — n is e cell t little a db o will fo d of very great s ervice . Du dce i r d ee tiser. A DB O K O F A H N O C H R IST I N E T H IC S .

Pro fe or VI LL D U ers f rde B . n o e en . y ss DA DSON , . , iv ity Ab

we - h u li - re e o n u i A ll t o g t out t atis a S bject o f the highest imp o rtance. This s the best kind o f service which a clear thinker who regards the s ubject without o e u an m c l ro e o n can ren er to the c u e o f what a h stil disp t t ight al p f ssi al bias , d a s - ator. revealed religion . Spect

SC O H A D L N D B B TTIS C T H E RA S A A E YS .

B Rev . B T LE R ern e h y . D U , M . A . , Ab t y. n ro duc on b r T R D er ev P nc l Y D D. LL. R . . . With I t ti y V y i ipa S O , ,

’ - B u r c n f o e. Mr. tle s a c urate and well written chapters includ e o tice s o th s co e te and o her r c urc e ch are mo n u e fo r a e e and ll gia t pa ish h h s whi st disti g ish d g , styl ,

o r an ma n . d e o ener a ur e o fSco m e ae rc ec ure . Scots hist y , giv als a g l s v y ttish di vala hit t 3 G UILD T EXT - BO O KS

P r ic e d 6 . n e t .

LO O : 85 C . BL ND N A . AC K . E B : URGH R . R. CL R LI E DIN A K , MIT D .

Ed ed b er Re v. Pro . C H RT R E I D . L . D D. L . Ed n ur it y V y f A S , , , i b gh , ‘ an d Rev . . M . C LYM ON T D . D . erdeen J A , , Ab .

h All t e vo lume s in the Firs t Seri e s of the GUILD LIBRARY are al s o to be had in the Sixp enn y form with reduced con ten t s ; " ls o Bi e Manners and C us a bl toms .

L F E A N D D I C O N UC T .

B e r Re v. C ME R . EE LL . D. n L D D. e o f the y V y J A ON S , . , , D a C ha el Ro f p yal o S co tland.

30 h Thou sa nd t .

" n m nu f i ii s — e An e ce e o tr ue tio n . Reli ious R vi ew o v s x ll t a al g f Re iew .

E XPO S O O F T H E A P O S L E ’ R ITI N T S C E E D .

B Re D D r v. . . . C o or ne . y J DODDS , , st phi

l oth Thou a s nd .

' rea m ro emen o n e e l- kno n Pe r o n o f an e r er ener n A g t i p v t th w l w a s a li g atio . Aberdeen Journal. E H IST O R Y O F T H E NG L ISH B IB L E .

G G B D B Re v. R E I LL IG . C u . y E O M AN , , ap th

l oth Thousand .

m n o n u —E o tor k ﬁne er o o u e . x si Tim s This book is li e a s f ll wi g a bea tif l t xt p y e . A A A C H R C H M STR N D S C R ME S . U , INI Y, NT

LE D I B Re v. RM D . . n ern e . y NO AN MAC OD , , v ss

h T o and l ot h us .

” - — k Glas ow H era d . A model o f wha t such a text bo o should be . g l

N ow Read y. L E SS O S O N T H E G O SPE L O F ST MA RK . N .

R k v I . R E T D. n B Re . . D C c m n n y A OB SON , . , la a a . — Pr c ca m ure and c o r . u ndee Advertiser. a ti l , at s h la ly D

S D E S I N T H E A C S O F T H E A P O STL E TU I T S .

D n E B . o B v M. R RT . C lt es s Re . W . y OB SON , ,

- — firs r e ue in an e ce en er e . Pres b ter ia n A t at iss x ll t s i s y . 19 0 2 .

THE NE W TE STAMENT AND ITS

WRITERS

THE NE W TE STAMENT

AN D

I T S WR I T E R S

B Y TH E

RE V J A D D E RIN . . . . ( )

’ J I N - N “ R B EC K S P L E L G Y O F L 0 1 D . J . O O T TRA S ATOR . T ASTORA TH O ’ E N E W E MEN AN D U O O F E C OMMEN Y TH T STA T , A TH R TH TAR ’ ‘ N J O N G PE L I N E C EN U Y B I B LE ’ O ST. H S OS TH T R

TH IRTY-N I NTH TH OUSAND

NE W E DI TI ON RE VI SE AND E , D NLARGEI)

LO DO : . N N A C . BLAC K : SOHO S"UARE

E BURG H : R R C L RK . M E . LI D DIN A , IT

P B U L ICATION AG E N TS FOR T H E C HURC H OF SC OT LAND

1 9 0 2

AU T H OR’ S PRE FAC E

T H E author is glad to know that in addition to its circu

- C - The N ew Tes tamen t a nd lation as a Bible lass text book , its Writers has been Of service to many adult students who desire to learn something for themselves o f the anthem ticity and original purpose Of the various writings o f which the Sacred Record is composed . It is for such general readers that the present edition is chieﬂy intended . The text has been carefully revised 3 the chapter on Ga la tians has b ee n recast in the light Of recent discussions and the additional matter introduced in the form o f Notes and Appendix will , it is hoped , considerably enhance the value o f the book for those whose library d o es not co n

Of tain many works a Biblical nature . For inform ation on a number o f kindred to pics (such

C o r C MSS. f as the anon , , Versions, Textual riticism) and

r fuller notes , the reader may be refer ed to the demy

8 vo edition of this book recently published .

M‘ C LY . . MONT J A .

1 1 7 8 7 6 IN c r ure Re fe re nce en the n m e o f the Bo ok not en S ipt s , wh a is giv , n re fer to the Bo o k unde r d c u o n the ci tati o s is ssi . en c r ure uo e d the o rd o f the Re s ed ers on Wh S i pt is q t , w s vi V i a re giv e n . Re ed ers o n vis V i . u oris ed er ion A th V s .

Manuscript .

C o mpare. C ONTE NT S

C P HA . TH E 1 . N E w TE STAMEN T

2 . T H E Go s p E Ls

" - 3. TH E GO PE L R I G T o T TTH E W 20 2 5 S ACCO D N S . MA

“ T U E G PE L R I G T O ST R K 2 6 - 32 OS ACCO D N . MA

“ TH E G PE L R G o ST L KE 33- 40 OS ACCO D IN T . U

TH E G PE L I T O T OH 4 1 - 50 OS ACCO RD NG S . J N

“ TH E ACT S OF T H E APOST LE S

TH E E PI STLE S 5 8 - 59

TH E E PI T E O F P L 59 - 63 S L S ST . AU

“ E O F P T H P T E T 9 . T H E F I RST PI ST LE AU L E A OS L O

T H E T H ESSALON IANS 6 4 - 68

TH E S ECOND E PI ST LE OF PAU L APOST LE TO

T H E TH E SSALON IANS

“ ' TH E I R E PI T E F P L T H E P T L E 1 0 10. F ST S L O AU A OS

TH E C O RINT H IANS X T H E N E W TESTAM ENT AND ITS W RITERS

C R AP . PA G ES “ 1 ‘ 1 . TH E S E COND E PIST LE OF PAU L T H E APOS I LE T O

T H E C O RI NT H IANS 80- 85

1 H PI - 2 . T E E ST LE OF PAU L T O T H E GALAT IANS 86 99

“ H E E 1 3. T PIST LE OF PAU L T H E APOST LE T O T H E

RO MANS 1 00- 1 06

4 H E PI T LE H E M - 1 . T E S S O F T I PR ISONME N T 1 07 1 1 0

T H E E PIST L E OF PAU L T H E APOST LE T O T H E

PH I LI PPIANS 1 1 0- 1 1 5

“ 1 T H E E PI T LE O F P L T H E P T LE T O 5 . S AU A OS C O LOSS IANS

TH E E PI ST LE OF PAUL T O PH ILE MON

E EPI L o r L T H E P T LE T H E 1 6 . TH ST E PAU A OS o T

E PHE S IANS 1 26 - 1 31

1 32 - 1 34 1 T H E T L E PI T LE . 7 . PAS O RA S S

T H E F I RST E PI ST L E O F PAU L T H E APOS' I LE T O

T I MOT HY 1 34 - 1 38

1 TH E E PI T L E o r P L T O IT 1 39 - 1 4 2 8 . S AU T US

T H E S E COND E PI ST LE OF PAU L T H E A POST L E T O

T IMOT H Y 1 4 2 - 1 4 5

“ T H E E PI T LE O F P L T H E P T L E T o T H E 1 9 . S AU A OS

H E BRE W S 1 4 6 - 1 54

2 0 T H E C T H LI E PI T LE . . A O C S S

“ TH E GE N E RAL E PI ST LE O F JAME S

“ 2 1 TH E FI R T E PI T LE GE E R L OF PE T E R 1 62 - 1 69 . S S N A

T H E S ECOND E PI ST LE GE NE RAL OF PE T E R

TH E G E N E RAL E PI STLE o r JUDE CONTENTS

C P HA . “ 2 3 T H R T PI E R . E F I S E ST LE G N E AL OF JO H N

“ ” TH E S E COND E PI ST LE O F JO H N TH E TH I RD E PI STLE OF JO H N

“ - 24 TH E RE VE L T I O O F ST . O H T H E I VI E 1 85 1 92 . A N J N D N

A PPE N DI X A

LIT E RAT U RE OF T H E C H U RC H FAT H E RS AN D OT H E R EARLY W R IT E RS RE FE R RE D T O 1 93- 2 02

A P PE N DI X B

UNDE SIGN E D C OI NC I DE NC E S I N T H E GOSPE LS 2 03- 204

LIST OF BOOKS ON T H E SUBJ E CT 205 - 206

THE NE W T E ST AME NT AND

I T S WRI T E RS

C H A P T E R I

TH E NE W TE STAME NT

Name — I . The New Testament forms the second and concluding portion of the Revelation given to the world

in the line of Jewish history. It derives its name from an expression used by the Lord Jesus C hrist in the institution of the rite which was designed to com memorate His death This cup is the new testament “ - n ew in my blood more correctly, This cup is the covenant in my blood in contrast with the o ld L 20 covenant made with Moses ( uke xxii . ; Matt . xxvi .

5 E . 2 . r . . f 28 ; 1 C o . xi cf xod xxiv The use O the word “ testament in this sense was due to the Latin tes ta ment/win , which was early adopted as an equivalent ” for the Greek word meaning covenant . n u e — A of 2 . La g ag period about four hundred years had elapsed after the last Of the Old Testament Scriptures was o m written bef re the New Testament was com enced . e S In the int rval the Jewish people, preading far and wide

of ha in the pursuit arts and commerce, d become familiar 2 TH E NEW TESTAM ENT AND ITS WRITERS

G with the reek tongue, which was the intellectual bond o f R the civilised world , as the oman empire was its bond in a social and political sense . Into this language the Scriptures of the Old Testament had been translated from 2 H w 00 B . C . the ebre , about , at Alexandria, the great meeting - place of Rabbinical learning and Hellenic cul 1 of ture . From the amalgamation these and other elements there resulted a form of Greek known as the “ ” m r H G com on o ellenistic reek . It was in this lan — guage that the New Testa ment was written a language marvellously ﬁtted for the purpose, both because of the wide prevalence of Greek among the civilised nations of the time (resulting from the conquests of Alexander G o n o f the reat) , and account its unrivalled clearness, H richness , and ﬂexibility . ence the New Testament “ G has been aptly described as having a reek body, a H C ebrew soul , and a hristian spirit that animates them ” 2 both . C ont ents — S 3. The New Testament criptures consist

- f r of twenty seven dif erent books, varying in their fo m — order main l i t rical and character the ﬁrst in y , the ‘ hs p l next doctrinal , and the concluding portion re ating to

o vision and pr phecy. This is an order somewhat analo t Old gous to hat found in the Testament, many of whose characteristics alike as regards thought and expression

- are reﬂected in the Ne w Testament . The twenty seven bo oks are the work of nine different authors (assuming the Epistle to the H ebrews to have been written by some

St . P o ther person than aul) , each book having its special

‘ co rrespo ndipg t emongljt _gf_its characteristics ‘ p the p y h writer and the circumstances in which it was written, but

1 ' The e u in so c ed ec u e d to e b een executed S pt ag t, all b a s sai hav by seven ty Jews bro ught to Alexan dria from Jeru salem for this purp o s e P de u The or don e er r d by Ptolemy hila lph s . w k was v y g a ually and

d ee of l e een 2 80 C . and 1 50 n e r B B . C with varyi g g s skil b tw . 2 ' 5 3. ﬂ is t. A . Ch . Dr Ph. Scha H . 7 . , p p

4 THE NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

3 x C v ( ) the Ale andrine ( odex A), preser ed in the British 4 C Museum , and dating from the fifth century ; ( ) odex E hraemi C of — a a lim sest p ( ), also the fifth century p p , the ' original writing having been eflaced in the twelfth cen tury (but now revived) to make room for the writings of E hraem S 5 C za D of S p yrus ; and ( ) odex Be e ( ), the ixth L o f C am century, preserved in the University ibrary

ri . f b dge These and other ancient MSS. to the number o o ab ut a hundred are called Uncials, because written with capital letters without any separation between the words, — the others of a more modern character being called

u or C c Minusc les ursives, be ause written in a small f — running hand . O the latter there are about 2000 an o f MS immense array witnesses compared with the few S. a to can of classic l works preserved us, which frequently n n O be counted o the te ﬁngers. wing to the greater liability to error in copying with the hand than in the of the R n use printing press, about Various eadi gs M S have been discovered in the extant S . of the New ff Testament . Happily the di erences between the readings are for the most part so minute that they do no t affect the substance of revealed truth . As it is the duty of the C to hurch , however, ascertain , as far as possible, the

r o f exact wo ds the sacred writers, a special department o f s study has been in tituted , commonly known as Textual C a im on riticism , which has for its to adjudicate the rival

o f a n h claims the various re di gs, wit due regard to the

a age and special ch racteristics of the several manuscripts, as well as to the common risks of misapprehension and inadvertence to which all copyists were liable . — In 5 . Other Witness es the performance of the diﬂi cult and delicate ta sk just mentioned attention must

to t wo o f o be paid other valuable sources informati n . ( 1 ) Those writings o f C hurch Fathers ranging from the end of the ﬁrs t century to the fourth or ﬁfth century of the THE NEW TESTAM ENT 5

— C hristian era which contain quotations from the New 1 Testament . The value of the Fathers as a help in deter mining the exact text o i Scripture is a good deal impaired o f C by the fact that, not having the advantage a oncord

o r o u r ance, of divisions into chapters and verses, they frequently quote from memory and not with strict 2 f a . o ccuracy This is less moment, however, when the object is not so much to ascertain the precise language of Scripture as to prove the existence and general recep tion o f the books o f the New Testament at an early 3 2 period in the history o f the C hurch . ( ) Ancient m o f Versions or Translations, so e which (for example the Syriac and Old Latin) were made withi n a century after 4 of the time the apostles . h — E 6 . Engli s Versions The ﬁrst nglish Version was li ' W e ﬂ 1 383. completed by John y in It was, however, only the translation of a translation (the Latin Vulgate

1 h N Te In re ec e as in the m er of . t e ew this sp t, as w ll att MSS , sta ment bo oks o ccupy a much better position than m ost of the an ci ent c c lassi s . 2 The r C oncord nce roduced An on u of P du fol ﬁ st a was p by t i s a a,

o ed C rd n H u o in the r een cen ur . To the er l w by a i al g , thi t th t y latt was also due the division of the Bible into the e xisting chapt ers b ut the d on n o er e the or of Ro ert e en the ce e r ed ivisi i t v s s was w k b St ph s, l b at ed or and r n er of the New T e men it p i t sta t . 3 For in formation regarding the Church Fath ers wh o s e citations

- are re erred to in u e uen c er see en d 1 93 2 02 . f s bs q t hapt s, App ix A , pp . ’ The c ons em e e ma b e ound in C r er Can on icit or itati th s lv s y f ha t is y, ’ in e co 8 H ist o the N ew T s ta n a on W st tt ory f e me t C n . 4 T e e a o fford u e e dence as to the c non c o f h s , ls , a val abl vi a i ity — particular books some o f them having been current as early as the econd cen ur an d e n re er ed in nc en . d n in s t y , b i g still p s v a i t MSS ati g, ome m th our n n u d c e ro e a d ce r e . re r s as s , f f th , ﬁfth, sixth t i s As ga s readin s e r e mon o ten un cer n o n o the n of e c g , th i t sti y is f tai wi g t wa t xa t corresp ondence between th eir language and that of the original ; but ere the r n on of er c r c er as for e m e wh t a slati is a lit al ha a t , it is , xa pl , in the c e of the Old L n er on the n u e of the or n in as ati V si s , la g ag igi al a d u ed a a n n isp t pass ge m y b e i ferred with a n ear approach to certai ty. Even the errors o f the translator sometimes indi cate quite plainly what ord he had e ore him in the Gree e in ue on o f the w s b f k ; whil , a q sti omi on or n er on o f c us e an ord n r er on S e n ssi i s ti a la , i a y v si p aks as plai ly as . in the or n a MS igi al . 6 TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

S . E of t Jerome) . The ﬁrst nglish translation from the G 1 5 2 5 reek was ﬁnished by William Tyndale in , and put in print the following year at Worms . This was followed ’ by Miles C o verdale s translation o f the whole Bible in ’ 1 5 35 Grea t B ible C ra nmer s for ; the , usually called ( use C 1 5 39 Geneva B ible 1 5 5 7 in hurches), in , the in , the ’ ’ B isho s B ible 1 5 68 Kin J ames s B ible p in , and g (the i 1 61 Au thorised Vers on ) in 1 . The most recent and reli able results o i Biblical criticism are embodied in the R o f 1 88 1 has evised Version , which in this respect, as in to n regard accuracy of translatio , an unquestionable superiority over the Authorised Version , the latterhaving e b en made at a timewhen the sciencewas still in its infancy, MSS and before any o f the three chief . above mentioned P were available for reference . ossibly the next generation r of may see fu ther improvements, as the result a closer

o f MSS. examination , Versions, and other ancient writings, as well as through an enhanced appreciation of t he of language the New Testament, in the light of the Greek translation of the Old Testament (the Septuagint) H and other ellenistic literature ; but, after all , any points in which o u r English Bible is capable o f improve ment are inﬁnitesimal compared with the general trust Of worthiness o i its contents . its imperfections as a t transla ion it may be said , with scarcely less truth than f “ o obscurities in the original , that like the spots upon

o f the surface the sun , they neither mar the symmetry nor impair the glory of the great Source of ou r Life and ” Light which is imaged in them . C H A PT E R II

TH E GOSPE LS

Name and Na ure — At o f 1 . t the head the New Testa ment stand the four Gospels . This position has been ﬁtl y assigned to them, because, although by no means the o f earliest written the New Testament Books, they con tain a record of the life and ministry of Jesus C hrist which forms the corner zstone o f the whole fabric C hristianity being essentially a historical religion , basing

on o n . its doctrines not fancy but fact The name gospel, which is the Saxon equivalent for a word in the original “ ” ’ o f C meaning good tidings, was ﬁrst all applied to hrist s

. 2 3 . preaching (Matt iv . ; Mark i and to that of the r apostles ( 1 C o . ix . In course of time it came to be applied also to the books containing a record o f the great facts and truths which formed the substance o f that n e of preaching . O the earliest writers to use the word i n s thi sense is Justin Martyr, who wrote about the 1 He middle of the second century . frequently refers to

Memoirs composed by the apostles and their companions,

1 Bas ilides 1 2 5 uo ed H o u c e o n . 9 as ( q t by ipp lyt s , it s J h i ” d in the Go els but ome n o u muc re on the sai sp , s thi k, with t h as , that ’ ord are t b re err d on of lides c m re n o er w s o e f e to e Basi s hoo l e ly. A th in n ce has een oun d in the A olo o Aris tides d n ro sta b f p gy f , ati g p bably “ rom the e r r of the econd cen u r c men on the cred f a ly pa t s t y, whi h ti s sa writing which among them ( the Christians) is call ed Gospel (literally '

e n e c an d o in the Dida che c eems e en o der. va g li als , whi h s v l 8 TH E NE W TESTAM ENT AND ITS WRITERS

“ G which, as he tells us, were called ospels and he informs us that they were read along with the writings of the prophets at the meetings for Christian worship on the ’ L Da ord s y.

— Mem ir . o s 2 Authent icity . That the to which Justin refers are the same as the Gospels which we now possess may be inferred from the circumsta nce that almost all the facts concerning C hrist’s life which he mentions in about 200 scatte red passages o f his writings are found in one or o f G other the four ospels, while in all the express quota — — tions seven in n u mber which he makes from the Memoirs the words quoted are also to be found in our

Gospels . This conclusion is strengthened by the fact that

1 A . D of about twenty years later ( 70 . ) a disciple Justin

- - named Tatian , a well informed and far travelled man , drew up in the Syriac language a sort o f harmony of the

r G a e Dia tes saron fou ospels ( c ll d ), which had a very large Ea circulation in the st . An Arabic translation of this work and a Syriac commentary on it have recently been G discovered , from which it is evident that the four ospels ’ o n which Tatian s work was founded were identical with

M ra rian Fra men t . u to t ours In the g , also, there is a lis o f a New Test ment books, which most critics assign to G L 1 70 A . D . about , where the ospels of uke and John are mentioned as third and fourth, the other two being

of MS. apparently mentioned in a part the now lost . If

r further corrobo ation be needed , we have it in the uni

- 1 85 l A . versal y admitted fact that ﬁfteen years later ( D. ) the four Gospels which we possess were circulated in all

o f C — E — in parts hristendom urope, Asia, and Africa thousands of copies for the use of innumerable Christians who heard them read at their weekly meetings for worship . Fo r these reasons it seems to admit of no doubt that ’ Justin Martyr s Gospels were the same as ours ; and it is THE GOSPELS 9 easy to trace them back through a series o fs till earlier writers to the testimony o f the apostles . We know that 1 s 4 . D Marcion the Gnostic ( 1 0 A . ) built his ystem largely G o f L o f on the ospel uke, which he published a mutilated ’ edition known as Marcion s Luke . In contrast with G Marcion , Tertullian places Valentinus, another nostic

1 40- 1 60 one ( as who used the canon in its entirety. P of H A prominent witness is apias (Bishop ierapolis), who wrote an E xp osition of the Ora cles of OW L ord about

35 ld . 1 A . D . o , when he was an man Among other things which he had gathered from personal intercourse with friends of the apostles and with two disciples of the Lord “ ( on e the Elder he tells us the circumstances under which Matthew wrote his Oracles and Mark his 2 Oracles o he L d t or . S f till earlier, we , ﬁnd many quota tions more or less exact from o ur Gospels in the lately ’ Dida che or of discovered , Teaching the Twelve ” Apostles (dating from the end of the ﬁrst or the early of of Basilid part the second century) , in the language es “ ” 1 25 - on G ( who wrote twenty four books the ospel , and in the short extant writings of Polycarp (a disciple of 1 1 5 A . D . the Apostle John , who wrote before , martyred “ ” 1 5 5 - 1 5 6 o f Hermas and Barnabas (early in the

of C of R 95 - 96 second century) , and lement ome (

1 The Gnos tics (who derived th eir name from a Greek word m ean ing kn owledge) claimed a deeper insight into the mysteries of religion than was o e ed the ord n r el e er But e r e d p ss ss by i a y b i v . th y always p of ss e to be in debted for this kn owl edge to th eir fu ller comprehension o f the m e n of ri e H en ce the re uenc f a ing Sc ptur . f q y o their app eals to the N ew Te men r n For the e r e d nc r ce in the sta t w iti gs . a li st isti t t a s Christian C hurch of the t en dencies whi ch afterwards developed into m - Gnos c s ee . 1 1 9 1 2 0 an d 1 80 1 82 ti is , pp , . 2 C f. 2 6 . 1 95 . pp , 3 Th e extan t Chr istian writings o f the ﬁrst century ( oth er than the N ew Te men are e reme me re e th sta t) xt ly ag , whil e writings of the second century till near its clo se are mainly defences o f Christianity (Ap ologies ) ddre ed to un e e er e er uo n a ss b li v s , with f w q tatio s from the New Testa men n e had een n ended for mem er o f he u t tha if th y b i t b s t Ch rch . B ut the u nce and e en the n u e o f o ur Go e o en o s bsta , v la g ag , sp ls is w v int the e r ie C r n r n e come do n to us a l st h istia w iti gs that hav w . 10 TH E NEW TESTAM ENT AND ITS WRITERS

MS ld They are also found in all S. of the Syriac and O L o f atin Versions, both which are known to have existed

S r . in the second century, the y iac in the earlier half of it P To this we may add that in the undisputed epistles of aul, ’ w ou r L written ithin a generation after ord s death , there ’ are C numerous allusions to hrist s history, teaching, and example, which harmonise with the facts recorded in the four Gospels . In these circumstances we may challenge those who throw doubt on the credibility of the Gospels to show at what pe riod it was even p ossible for forgery or falsiﬁcation to u be perpetrated , and perpetrated so successf lly as to s of C impo e upon all branches the hurch, leaving its members and teachers utterly unconscious of the — deception that had been practised on them this, too in f o f , matters af ecting the most vital interests C ’ the hurch s faith, regarding which the apostles had been testifying ever since the day of Pentecost o n which they began to preach in the name of their Risen

Master . Of the estimation in which the Gospels were held we o f a of may judge from the words Iren eus, a disciple P o f olycarp, who, towards the close the second century, “ speaks of the written Gospel as the foundation and pillar of o ur faith and says regarding the Scriptures which he deﬁnes to be the writings both of prophet and S evangelist the criptures, being spoken by the Word d ” 1 an d S o f Go . pirit , are perfect — . in 3 Orig For many years, probably for more than C a generation , after the death of hrist, there does not appear to have been any authorised record o f H is life and the teaching in the C hurch . The charge which apostles

1 The genuineness o f the fourth Gosp el is spec ially dealt with in dence i be ound ec c e c . vi. ere add on e hap , wh iti al vi w ll f sp ially appli abl to that Gosp el .

1 2 THE N EW TESTAM ENT AND ITS WRITERS

at a later. period , which were designed not so much to meet the spiritual wants of the Church as to gratify an 1 idle curiosity . It is a remarkable fact that two of o ur Gospels do not to claim have been written by apostles, but only by companions of apostles ( Mark and Luke) ; and that of the other two only o n e bears the name of an apostle o f eminence (John) . This is, so far, a conﬁrmation of their genuineness for if they had been forgeries claiming an to authority which they were not entitled, they would have been pretty sure to claim it in the highest form . The same circumstance shows that the apostles generally did not regard it as a d uty to record their testimony in writing . In the discharge o f their commission as preachers of Go the spel , they doubtless followed the practice which was common in the East o f trusting to memory rather h o as C t an to written d cuments and the hurch extended, and they were n o longer able to minister personally to the wants of their converts or o f those who required to G to w have the ospel preached them, it ould become their duty to train evangelists and catechists to assist them in the work . In preaching to the heathen, it would only be the leading facts of C hrist’s life that would require to n be proclaimed, but in the instructio of those who had already accepted the mes sage of salvation it would be s a to o C nece s ry g more into detail, and set hrist before them as a guide and pattern in their daily life . This instruction was doubtless given in an oral form, the

1 ocr Go e are kno n to us e de c About fifty ap yphal sp ls w (b si s A ts, e and oc e b ut o f m n onl the n me or r e Epistl s, Ap alyps s) ; a y y a s b i f er ed T e u u l ounded in the r n e fragments have been pres v . h y s a ly ab st a g m ou more e ec in connec on the n nc and an d arvell s, sp ially ti with i fa y childhood of our Lord ; and traces of their influence may be seen in r To u or ome ere the ur o e of Christian art and po et y . s pp t s h sy was p p s o man y of the apocryp hal G spels . THE GOSPELS 1 3 scholars repeating the lesson again and again after their 1 teachers . ’ The histo ry o f Christ s life and teaching was thus originally set forth not in the form o f a chronological narrative but rather as a series of lessons imparted by the apostles and their fellow - labourers as occasion re “ ” o r of one quired , to meet the needs their hearers, as C h P o f the early hurc Fathers ( apias) says, referring to ’ D or Peter s style of preaching . uring the twelve years more that elapsed before the dispersion of the apostles s of from Jeru alem, a recognised course instruction had C doubtless gained currency in the hurch , corresponding ’ P of of C to St . eter s definition the period in the life hrist which was the preper subject for apostolic testimony Beginning from the baptism of John unto the day that ” he (Jesus) was received up from us (Acts i . With this agree specimens of apostolic preaching conta ined in

1 9 20 3 - 4 3 23 o f . 6 . the Book Acts (iv . , ; x xiii as well as allusions which the a po stles make in their epistles G of to the ospel preached by them , and to the knowledge ’ C 1 C or 2 hrist s life acquired by their converts ( . ii . ; xi .

- - l - 1 4 Ga . 1 1 P 1 2 1 23 27 . . et . . 8 . xv iii i , etc ) A close o f examination such passages makes it evident that, while ’ Christ Jesus was the constant theme of the apostles o n preaching, they dwelt chieﬂy the great facts that — formed the consummation of His ministry His suffer ings, death, and resurrection ; and we may regard it as an evidence o f the faithfulness with which o ur Gospels represent the earliest preaching and teaching of the

i apostles, that they g ve such prominence to the closing ’ o ur L scenes in ord s history. We have another token of

1 “ This is the meaning o f the word instru cted (literally catechis ed) in Lu e 4 . We e no er k i . hav a th trace of such systematic instructio n “ in the e re on us ed in c 4 2 : T e he “ xp ssi A ts ii . h y (t converts ) con ’ inned ed in h ea c n t st fastly t e apostles t hi g. 14 THE NEW TESTAM ENT AND ITS W RITERS their authentici ty in the fact that they narrate events not in the light reﬂected on them by the subsequent

o f S r teaching the pi it, but as they were actually regarded by the disciples at the time of their occurrence . o ur G It would seem that before ospels were composed, attempts had been made by private persons to d raw up S ’ a connected history of the aviour s life, or at least of

S St . His ministry . uch attempts are referred to by

r 1 Luke in the p eface to his Gospel (i . In all prob ability he is alluding to other documents than the Gospels the we possess, not only because he speaks of writers as “ ” many, in a tone scarcely consistent with the respect due to apostolic authors, but because a comparison of the four Gospels leads to the conclusion that he could not have had any of the three others before him when he drew up his narrative . Whatever part the documents L referred to by St . uke may have had in determining the shape in which the oral Gospel was ﬁnally to be

o f recorded , all them were ultimately superseded by our G present ospels, in whose preservation and triumph we “ of may see an illustration , in the highest sense, the ” survival o f the ﬁttest .

— O11 o f G D versi . 4 . i ty a comparison the several ospels , a marked difference is at once apparent between the T he fourth and the three preceding ones . latter are

s no tical called y p , because they give in one common view r r the same general outline o f the minist y of Ch ist . This outline is almost entirely conﬁned to His ministry in Galilee and includes only one visit to Jeru salem whereas the fourth Gospel gives an account of no less than ﬁve visits

to the capital , and lays the scene of the ministry chieﬂy

in Jud aea . A still more important distinction between to them with regard the nature of their contents, has , been brieﬂy expressed by designating the synoptical ’

bodil G St . Gospels as the y ospels, and John s as the TH E GOSPELS 1 5

— sp iritua l Gospel by which it is meant that the former relate chieﬂy to o utward events connected with the ’ S fo r aviour s visible presence , reported the most part

o r without note comment, while the latter is designed to represent the ideal and heavenly side o f His personality f and work . Akin to this distinction is the act that the ’ ﬁrst three Gospels 1 eport Christ s addresses to the of multitude, consisting largely parables, while the fourth a of Gospel cont ins discourses a more sublime character, frequently expressed in the language of allegory and

r ad dressed to the inne circle o f His followers . When we enter into a closer examination of the three s na tic G o ne y p ospels and compare them with another, of we ﬁnd an amount similarity in detail, extending even to minute expressions and the connection of individual of incidents, combined with a diversity diction, arrange fﬂ ment, and contents, which it has hitherto ba ed the

f r ingenuity o c itics to explain fully . A general idea of their mutual relations may be gathered from the following comparison . If the contents o f each Gospel be reckoned 1 00 o f , the relative proportion those things in which a Gospel agrees with o n e or other o f its fellows to those things in which it stands alone would be as follows

It is fo und that the coincidences in language are much — fewer than they are in su bstance which is only what might have been expected , if the several accounts are derived from independent witnesses . Reckoning the m St aterial coincidences in . Matthew to be 5 8 as above , the verbal coincidences would only amount to 1 6 o r

1 7 in St . Mark the former would be 93 as compared 1 6 TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS w 1 St L 4 1 ith 7 of the latter ; in . uke as compared with 10 . It further appears that by far the greater number o f these verbal coincidences are met with in the report of L ’ our ord s discourses and other sayings, a circumstance which conﬁrms us in the belief that the Gospel was fo r of handed down a number years in an oral form, as the preachers and teachers wo uld feel bound to adhere to strictly the very words in cases of reported speech , whereas they would be under no such obligation in the

r o f . na ration events As regards the latter, a consider able modification o f the oral Gospel would naturally take plac e during the long period that elapsed before it was committed to writing . The modification would vary in ff of C di erent parts the hurch ; and it is in this way, as well as by taking into account the possibility o f fresh lessons being added from time to time by those who had f ” L been eyewitnesses and ministers o the word ( uke i . f that we can best account for dif erences, both in expression in u n acco unt and substance, which would otherwise seem ’ If a was able . the postles teaching originally given in — Aramaic the form of Hebrew then spoken in Palestine r e G and had to be t anslat d into reek by the catechists, this would help still further to account for the di versity we meet with in the Gospels . —It Harmon . 5 . y is possible that further study and in vestigation may shed more light 0 11 the historical and G i literary relations of the four ospels, but meant me it is clear that the true way to discern their harmony is not to attempt to piece them together in the vain hope to o f forming a complete chronological history, but study each from its own point of View and learn from it what it has to teach concerning the many- sided life and character G o f Jesus Christ . No one ospel could possibly do justice to the infinite significance of the great theme and instead i of f o f causing perplex ty, the existence four dif erent TH E GOS PELS 1 7

Gospels should rather be matter of thankfulness, as setting Christ before us in so many different aspects o f His divinely human personality, much in the same way as various portions of the Old Testament set Him forth o f prophetically under the several aspects prophet, priest, lawgiver, and king . of G From the nature the case, the ospels are necessarily

St. fragmentary, as indicated by John when he says “ there are also many other things which Jesus did, the o ne which , if they should be written every , I suppose that even the world itself would not contain the books that should be written (xxi . The same writer gives to of G us a key the interpretation his ospel when he says,

These are written , that ye may believe that Jesus is the C Son o f God hrist, the and that, believing, ye may have ” l o f life in his name (xx . In ike manner each the G other ospels, while historical in its character, is animated by a special purpose of its o wn with its appropriate O grouping and selection of events . wing to the frequent ’ of C change scene and audience in hrist s ministry, the historical sequence could not be strictly adhered to by on e o f any desirous to trace, from any point view, the

o f His . h progress teaching At the same time, t ere was His in a gradual development in ministry, culminating His death , resurrection, and ascension ; and this g radual

advance we ﬁnd reﬂected in each of the four Gospels . Un ity amid diversity is what we have to look for in G S f the ospels, as in the criptures generally ; and o this

we have a token in the time - honoured fancy of the C G hurch, by which the four ospels are likened to the

- of four visaged cherubim, having the faces a man , a lion , ox an , and an eagle . This comparison has been variously

applied, but the interpretation followed in modern works o f S t. art, after Jerome , identiﬁes the four faces with the G o f L ospels Matthew, Mark , uke, and John respectively, 1 8 THE NEW TESTAM ENT AND ITS W RITERS

r as setting forth the human , the conque ing, the sacriﬁcial , ’ - r and the heaven egarding aspects of Christ s being . We shall probably be nearer the truth , however, if we say that ’ while the ﬁrst Gospel sets forth Christ s life and teaching

as t of Old with reference to the p , as the fulﬁlment the G of Testament, the ospel Mark exhibits that life in the present as a manifestation o f the activity and power so R L G to St . congenial the oman mind ; uke, as a reek , depicts it in its catholic and comprehensive character, as destined in the fu ture to embrace within its saving inﬂuence all the kindreds o f the Gentiles ; while the fourth Gospel represents it in its absolute perfection as it i is related to the Father in etern ty . While there is 110 such thing as uniformity in Scripture C any more than in Nature or the hurch , there is an essential and deep - lying unity which canno t be broken without serious injury to the truth . The right way to use G to the ospels is combine their various testimony, allowing each to tell its story in its own way and to contribute its allotted part to a full and adequate con ’ ception of the Lord s personality and work . While each o f o wn possesses a distinct individuality its , they may and ought to be united in order to form a complete and w g rander hole . In this sense they have been likened to of the four parts music, which may be sung apart, but

blend together to form a perfect harmony . A striking parallel has been drawn by Bishop Westcott 1 between the work of the ﬁrst three evangelists and the threefo ld

r 1 ff portrait of Cha les . (taken from three di erent points o f view) which Vandyke prepared for the sculptor ; 2 while Dean Farrar furnishes a beautif ul illustration “ when he says that the ﬁrst three evangelists give u s

diverse aspects o f one glorious landscape St . John pours

1 l r uct on to the Stud o the Gos e s . 2 51 . I n t od i y f p , p 2 Mess a es o the B ooks . 1 1 . g f , p

C H A PT E R III

TH E G SPE L CC R ING TO sr M TTH E W O A O D . A

— ’ u S . 1 . A thorshi p t Matthew s Gospel has been described o ne who M by can scarcely be accused of partiality ( .

“ ‘ Renan) as the most important book o f C hris tendom the most importa nt book that has ever been written . a d no t of Its import nce is derive , from the genius the writer, but from the grandeur of the subject . Acco rding to the unanimous tradition o f the ancient C as G hurch, preserved in the title which this ospel has borne ever since the second century and confirmed by the testimony of the early C hurch Fathers beginning w P ith apias in the first half of the second century, the e o f o f writ r the book was Matthew, one the twelve of apostles . But for his authorship this book, Matthew of would have been one the least known of the apostles, as neither Scripture nor tradition gives us much informa N or o f tion regarding him . ot a single word act his after he became a disciple of o ur Lord is recorded in the Go spels ; and in the Book o f Acts his name is never mentioned after the descent of the Holy Spirit o n the P H e to day o f entecost . is evidently be identified with

1 4 1 5 L 2 - 2 9 L . . 7 . evi the publican (Mark ii , ; uke v cf 9 G Matt . ix . , although it is only in his own ospel 3 “ l ” (x . ) that the despised term pub ican is associated H E 2 1 ST. MATT W

“ with his apostolic name of Matthew ( the gift of God which was probably given to him when he was called to ’ S P . the apostleship, as imon s name was changed to eter He seems to have been a man o f worldly means and o f a o n generous disposition , judging from the fact that the “ o f occasion his apostolic call , when he forsook all, and “ ” rose up and followed Jesus, he made a great feast to which he invited a number o f his old associates . It is noteworthy that he leaves it to the other evangelists to mention him as the giver of this feast and to record his sacriﬁce of property in following Christ while we have a further token of his modesty in the fact that he puts the o f own of name Thomas before his in the list apostles, in reversing the order followed the other Gospels . Traces ’ of the writer s profession as a tax - gatherer have been i found in his use of the term tribute money (xxi . where the other evangelists employ the more common “ 1 5 L . word penny (Mark xii . uke xx and in his “ 4 6 L o f . use the word publicans (v , uke “ ” 32 d L . employs the wor sinners ( uke vi , But o f perhaps the latter instance, like his use the word G ” entiles in the same passage, is an indication rather of his Jewish nationality . P According to an ancient tradition derived from apias,

G H - Matthew wrote his ospel in ebrew, to which Irenaeus adds that he published it among the Jews “ while Peter and Paul were preaching in Rome and ” n E foundi g the C hurch there . usebius in the beginning of the fourth century tells us that Matthew wrote it when he was about to leave the Jews and preach also to “ to other nations, in order to ﬁll up the void about be d ” ma e in his absence . If this tradition be correct, the Hebrew original must have been very soon superseded by G G the reek ospel which we now possess . This was only to of H w be expected, considering the growing disuse ebre , 2 2 TH E NEW TESTAME NT AND ITS WRITERS and the gradual lapse o f the Jewish C hristians into a 1 heresy which alienated them from the rest of the Church . Whether the Gospel was written over again by Matthew G o r in reek , translated , perhaps under his supervision , by G some other writer, with additions from a reek source, is a o t questi n which we canno certainlyanswer . That Matthew may have written the Gospel in both languages is in itself n o t unlikely, as we know that Josephus wrote his history both in H ebrew and in Greek— these two languages being P as E both current in alestine at that time, nglish and 2 Ga H o f S elic are now in the ighlands cotland . m t n — ff 2 . Date of Co posi io From evidence a orded by a study of the book itself (taken in connection with the tradi tion above mentioned) , it has been reasonably inferred that the Go spel in its present form probably appeared before

6 A D . o des ru 6 . t t c , when the war which was issue in the o n o f tion o f the Jewish capital was the eve breaking o ut . Such evidence is found in the use o f the expressions ” “ ” “ o f holy city, the holy place, the city the great 5 5 35 1 . h King (iv . ; v . xxiv . xxvii as well as in t e myste rious nature o f the language used by the Saviour in ’

H is of . prediction the city s coming doom In particular, 1 5 wh the ca ution given by the writer in xxiv . ose ” or readeth , let him understand ) would have had no force meaning after the predicted calamity had occurred . Character and C on n s — 3. te t The leading charac

1 onite ere s o n med rom H e re ord me n n The E bi h sy, a f a b w w a i g

the ear e C ri n e n no ed for e r o er . p oor, ly J wish h stia s b i g t th i p v ty Their heresy consisted for the mo st part in holding the continu ed o o n o f the e i Law and den n the n of the our bligati J w sh , yi g Divi ity Savi e The n me o f azarenes or n while admitting His M ssiahship . a N ( igi ally c 5 ed in the o ur given to Christians generally A ts xxiv . ) was appli f th ere c ec who con nued to o er e the e La cen tury to a less h ti al s t ti bs v J wish w. 2 m o ound . B con u ed M o dern in stan ces ay als be f ; e g. a p blish a n on of Advancement o L earnin in an e ended Latin tra slati his f g, xt B ut m form under the title De A ugmen tis Scien tiarum. it ust b e admitt ed to b e a weak po int in this theory that there is no trace o f it in the writings of the Fathers . H E 3 ST. MATT W 2

’ G teris tic St . of Matthew s ospel , as might be expected H in a work intended for the ebrews, consists in the

of the Mess iah representation Jesus as , in whom was fulfilled the Law and the Prophets . In this respect it is fitl Old y placed immediately after the Testament, as the ld n w uniting link between the o and the e covenants . “ of The first verse strikes the keynote, The book the of C of D so n of generation Jesus hrist, the son avid, the — Abraham son of David as the heir o f the promised so n o f of kingdom, Abraham as the child promise in whom all the families of the earth were to be blessed . The whole book may be regarded as depicting the gradual realisation of these claims in a spiritual sense ; the culminating point being reached in the glorious L “ declaration by the risen ord , All authority hath been G given unto me in heaven and on earth . o ye therefore

n z and make disciples of all the ations, bapti ing them into the name of the Father and o f the Son and o f the Holy Ghost : teaching them to observe all things whatsoever I

: n commanded you and lo, I am with you alway, even u to ”

. 1 8 the end of the world (Matt xxviii . In the course of the Gospel there are no less than sixty citatio ns Old of Testament prophecy as fulfilled in Jesus, the usual “ formula o f quotation being that it might be fulfilled E which was spoken by (the prophet) . qually significant “ is the frequency of the expression kingdom of heaven “ (literally kingdom of the heavens, reflecting the

H - ebrew idiom), which occurs thirty two times, and the “ D ” designation son of avid , which occurs seven times as applied to Jesus . The whole plan of the book is in harmony with its i Messianic character . First we have the nativity o f H m “ ” who was born King o f the Jews and was at the same ” to r i time save his people f om their sins (chaps . . ,

- r with the strange mingling of light and shadow, of glo y 2 4 TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

ffe of and su ring, which was to be typical the whole life . P iii —i Then comes the relude to the Ministry ( v. when the approach o f the kingdom of heaven is announced by o f the predicted Forerunner ; and the Baptism Jesus, as the fulﬁlment of all righteousness and the consecration to His public ministry, becomes the signal for a manifesta “ o f d in tion the ivine favour the voice from heaven, This ” Son — is my beloved , in whom I am well pleased, followed by the Temptation, in which the decisive choice is made “ ” between the kingdoms o f this world and the unseen kingdom o f the Spirit . The way is thus cleared for

o f S L successive representations the aviour as awgiver,

S r P K . rophet, and ing In the e mon on the Mount f H e v. o ( the charter the new kingdom , proclaims the Law as from a second Sinai with new meaning and — a H e power, little later charges the twelve apostles whom He commissions to preach the Gospel in His name — at another time He delivers the long series o f h parables in w ich the origin , progress, and final destiny — o f the kingdom are shown forth anon H e lays down the principles that are to guide the members of the C to o n e hurch in their relations another, especially to their erring brethren (xviii . ) Then as the conflict with fiercer hatred and unbelief grows ever , there break forth ’ H is o prophetic warnings of the nation s impending do m , and H is denunciations against the Jewish priests and

H e rulers, while becomes more and more outspoken in

- i . the assertion of H s Messianic claims (xxiii xxv . ) till at l C r last there comes the awfu tragedy upon the oss, com ’ letin H e to d G H P p g the sacriﬁce has o er as od s igh riest, and giving place in turn to the triumph of the Resu rrec

- tion (xxvi . xxviii . ) Interspersed throughout the whole m and are ighty works and gracious words, spoken wrought f Him for the suf ering and the sinful , which bespeak as

the Sent of God. H E ST. MATT W 2 5

m There is a wonderful sym etry in the whole narrative , 2 1 “ s . and many subtle contrast In xvi . , From that time began Jesus to shew unto his disciples ho w that he f ” must go unto Jerusalem and suf er and be killed, 1 “ to . 7 there is a striking contrast iv , From that time

R : began Jesus to preach , and to say, epent ye for the — kingdom of heaven is at hand the o n e marking the

of His P of His commencement assion , as the other active

Ministry . There is a correspondence also between the H is voice from heaven at Baptism (iii . and that Hi heard at His Transﬁguration (xvii . when s ministry reached its climax and was sealed by the divine testimony in the presence of the t wo greatest prophets of the old Mo ses E had covenant, and lias, as it just before been f P attested by the great confession o eter (xvi . That confession was a token that the ministry of power and

' o f love had done its work upon the hearts the disciples, and it is fitly followed by the announcement of His f a to appointed suf erings, the disciples being now re dy u of His follow their Master thro gh the valley humiliation , which was to conduct them at last from the blackness and darkness of death to the glories of divine life and immortality . A distinguishing feature o f this Gospel is the large 1 to words place assigned in it the of Jesus, arranged in a s stema tic r into y form , not b oken up fragments as they a are in the other Gospels . For this re son Godet ce m “ pares Luke to a botanist who prefers to contemplate a flower in the very place of its birth and in the midst of its natural surroundings, while Matthew is like the gardener who for some special object puts together large ” and magnificent bouquets . To some extent this remark is applicable to Matthew ’s grouping of incidents in our ’ L . ord s life, as well as to his arrangement of discourses

1 o oo Forming ab out a fourth part of the wh le b k . C H A PT E R IV

“ ” TH E GOSPE L R I N sr M RK ACC O D G TO . A

— 1 . Au hor hi t s p The testimony of the early Fathers, so far as it has reached us, unanimously ascribes the second s S Go pel to t . Mark ; but with equal unanimity they o f P connect it with the preaching the Apostle eter . The a P a e rliest witness is api s, the bishop already referred to on , who makes the following statement the authority o f John, a contemporary of the apostles if not the apostle “ Of that name . This also the elder used to say : Mark ’ P e having become eter s interpret r, wrote accurately all that he remembered of the things that were either said

r d n r o o e by C hrist ; but not in o der . For he neither L H im 1 heard the ord nor followed but subsequently, as to P e said , attached himself et r, who used to frame his

to of r teaching meet the wants his hea ers, but not as making a connected narrative of our Lord ’s oracles (or So n error discourses) . Mark committed o in thus writing down particulars just as he remembered them ; for he o to to of t ok heed one thing, omit none the things that he had heard, and to state nothing falsely in his account ” o f them . So little doubt seems to have been entertained re garding the Petrine authorship Of this Gospel that we ﬁnd Justin Martyr apparently referring to it as the

2 8 TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

R name for ome (p . Previous to his association P with eter in apostolic work abroad, Mark had ao companied Paul and Barnabas as their minister or r the 5 assistant, but had withdrawn f om work (Acts xiii . , o f After an interval some years, he rejoined his to cousin Barnabas, whose willingness receive him again as a colleague was so displeasing to Paul that he parted

on . 3 company with Barnabas this account (Acts xv . 7 P ’ We ﬁnd him again enjoying aul s conﬁdence, however, during the imprisonment of the latter at Rome for the apo stle commends him to the C olossians as one o f his

- o f Go d fellow workers unto the kingdom , who had been “ ” 1 0 l l P n C ol. to . a comfort him ( iv , hilemo , ver .

r to fo r Mark was then , appa ently, about set out Asia ; P and , accordingly, we ﬁnd aul, during his second imprison t to men , requesting Timothy bring him with him (from E was phesus) , because he useful to him for ministering

2 Tim . ( . iv This is the last time we hear Of Mark in Scripture ; but according to tradition he returned to R a o f P P ome, and after the m rtyrdom eter and aul, went A to lexandria, where he founded a famous catechetical ’ 1 school, and died a martyr s death . T n ow to urning internal evidence, we ﬁnd strong con

ﬁrmation o f the traditional account . The b ook may be described as very much an expansion or development o f the brief statement made by Peter in his address to 36 C ornelius and his friends (Acts x . It also follows closely the line of apostolic testimony which Peter had himself marked out immediately after the Ascension ’ o f b o ok P (Acts i . The whole tone the reﬂects eter s r i . a d energetic, impulsive, unconventional character Its p i o ne to e of transit on from incident anoth r , which we

’ 1 n en ur rk od d to e een r n I n the inth c t y St . Ma s b y is sai hav b t a s d rom Al e n dr to e n ce ere he een onoured porte f xa ia V i , wh has b h as - n r nce patron sai t eve si . R 29 ST. MA K have a striking illustration in the fact that the Greek ” “ word variously translated straightway, immediately, “ ” 1 -o ne forthwith, etc . , occurs in it no less than forty times ;

ractical ma tter - o - act tone its p f f , illustrated by the cir cumstance that it records eighteen miracles but only four 2 L His parables, while it twice represents the ord and disciples as having their hands so full o f work that 2 0 . 31 they could not so much as eat bread (iii . vi ) ’ its vivid descrip tion of the excitemen t occasioned by C hrist s o f on ministry, and the profound impression made thosewho Him heard and saw , which would be a subject congenial ’ to P . 27 . 2 1 2 . 33 eter s enthusiastic nature (i ii , vi , ’ omissi of P etc . ) its on some things redounding to eter s

e. . o n credit, g his designation as the rock which the 2 3 f 1 6 C . 9 0 o . . . hurch was to be built (viii , Matt xvi insertion o f o ther and the things ﬁtted to humble him, such as the rebuke he received when he would have dissuaded Jesus from submitting to His appointed suffer ings (viii . and the warning he received by the ﬁrst f 3 68 o . 0 crowing the cock (xiv , as well as the in troduction of deta ils which would be likely to dwell in P ’ 36 2 — 1 . eter s memory (i . ; xi . xvi 7) all these things lend a high degree of probability to the traditional ’ of P account eter s connection with this Gospel . As regards that part of the tradition which represents the Gospel as having been written at Rome for the C hristians

r of connection o the e, we ﬁnd conﬁrmation it in the f

Mark with Rome l oma a ready referred to, and in his R n “ ” name Marcu s H , which gradually superseded the ebrew “ John in the a bsence of the H ebrew genea logy of o u r

1 On e een ime in t e and e me in Luk ly ight t s Mat h w, ight ti s e. 2 Viz. the Sewer the u rd eed the c ed H u ndm n and , M sta s , wi k sba a , the eed ro in ecre — the e n ecu r to i Go e . It S g w g s tly, last b i g p lia th s sp l “ ” — is the kingdom o f God th ey refer to an expression that is char “ acteristic of r and Luke di n u ed rom the k n do Ma k , as sti g ish f i g m of ” ’ e en c is the u u orm in e Go e h av , whi h s al f Matth w s sp l . 30 THE N E W TESTAM ENT AND ITS WRITERS

L ex la J ewish w r na ion o s . t o d e . ord in the p f , g Boanerges “ “ ( which is Sons of Talitha cumi ( which t D is being in erpreted , amsel , I say unto thee, C “ E “ orban ( that is to say, phphatha ( that 1 . n 1 1 7 . 4 1 v . is, Be Abba (iii ; v 4 3 . f J ew . is o h cus toms e. vii ; xiv and , g . the washing f 3 P o . 1 2 hands (vii , and assover Observances (xiv .

4 2 La tin wor s a idi . d nd oms xv ) in the frequent use of , “ ” “ ” “ — e . . R g legion , centurion , quadrantes the oman to two 4 2 equivalent Jewish mites (xii . ) and very o f Alexa nder and Ru us specially in the mention f (xv . if the latter be, as seems very probable, the same person E as is referred to by St . Paul in his pistle to the Romans

- 1 3 xvi . . f i i — 2 . Dat e o C omp os t on With regard to the date of the Gospel we may co nclude in the light of what has been already mentioned that it was written between — ’ 6 A . D . 64 . 8 A D. and the latter being the year Of Nero s P P death , in whose reign eter and aul are believed to have 2 suffered martyrdom . n — If 3. Charact er and Conte ts the ﬁrst Gospel may be ﬁtl described as Messianic, the second may be y styled realis tic a u of , be ring traces througho t the graphic report o f an eyewitness . minu te a nd circu mstan tial It is , giving many details of person , number, place, and time that are not to be 4 in Go . 3 7 . 1 . found the other spels (xiii vi . xii i

1 The preservatio n o f thes e Aramaic expressions is a token o f ﬁdelity r o n to the origi nal t aditi . 2 It con n i e the r Go e ro ec of the e ruc on tai s , l k ﬁ st sp l , a p ph y D st ti o f eru em in orm c im e the re e en had not J sal , a f whi h pli s that g at v t

e e ec the ren e c e re on in . 1 4 yet taken place. Se sp ially pa th ti xp ssi xiii “ ( let him that readeth I f we accept the s uggestion me Ru u n med a o e men oned the in . 2 1 b v ti , that it is sa f s that is a xv f n m nd in Ro m . . 1 3 a o so ar co r on of o o c a xvi , this ls is a ﬁ ati its ap st li “ ” The rudene of Gree and com r e n en on date . ss its k its pa ativ i att ti re are c no ed ed n of its r m e c r c er to doctrin al inte sts a k wl g sig s p i itiv ha a t . R 31 ST. MA K

vivid descri tion It gives a p of the emotions, looks, gestures, 5 34 vii 33 o f o u r L . . and actions ord and others (iii , ; ; 3 32 ou ict 3 6 . . t wrcs ue . 3 . viii ; ix ; x , etc ) It brings the p g ’ chara cter o f many o f the scenes enacted in o ur Lord s f o f e. o ministry, g. in the narrative the feeding the five “ 35 - 4 4 G o f thousand (vi . ) this ospel alone tells us the fresh green grass o n which they sat down by hundreds and by fifties and the word used for companies ’ means ‘ ’ - P flo wer St . literally beds, as though to eter those multitudes, in their festal passover attire with its many O o f coloured riental brightness red and blue, looked like the patches of cre cu s and poppy and tulip and amaryllis ” a which he had seen upon the mount in slopes . In keep ing with this is the p ho tograp hic chara cter o f its account 1 of the Tran sfiguration and the cure o f the demoniac boy and of the Storm o n the Sea of Gennesaret

35 the ver word (iv . It also frequently reproduces y s 3 f 9 . 31 2 o . 6 f Jesus (iv . ; vi ; cf. Matt . viii ) and o “ 2 2 R o r others (vi using the term abbi, teacher “ of ( Master as the earlier mode addressing Jesus, w “ L ”2 38 here the other evangelists prefer ord (iv . ;

5 f . . 25 4 5 1 . . . 3 . o 0 ix ; x . Matt viii ; xvii ; xx and narrates events in the p resent tense as if they were just 4 0 . taking place (i . ; xiv h Altoget er, it is a simple, direct, forcible narrative, ’ and gives the general outline o f our Lord s ministry in a clearer form than either the Gospel of Matthew o r L H im u H uke . It sets before s as e worked and taught o f in the living present, making no mention the law, and scarcely ever quoting prophecy, but aiming simply

' te depict Him in that aspect of energetic and victorious

1 Raffa elle is mainly indebted to this Gospel for the details of his re c ure g at pi t . 2 We ﬁnd a similar instance o f literal accu racy in the habitual ” use of the n me Sim on in the e inn n o f the Go e e ore the a b g i g sp l , b f o o c n me o f Pe er had een con erred 1 6 2 9 30 ap st li a t b f (i . , , , 32 THE NEW TESTAM ENT AND ITS WRITERS

e to R m strength which was ﬁtt d impress the oman ind, “ and which is foreshadowed by the opening words, The ” o f C n o beginning the gospel of Jesus hrist the So of G d. ’ The following are the passages peculiar to Mark s Gospel

’ u The alarm of Jes s family (iii . n 2 6 The seed growi g secretly (iv . 32 The healing of one deaf and dumb (vii . 2 2 The gradual healing of the blind man (viii . 33 The exhortation to watch (xiii . o f 5 1 The ﬂight the young man (xiv . , C ertain details about the Lord ’s Resurrection 6 (xvi .

In this connection it may be well to recall the fact ’ that while Mark s Gospel has a larger proportion of

- — common matter than any Of the others amounting to — no less than 93 per cent of its whole contents this to is probably due, not its having borrowed from the o to r to thers , but its more st ict adherence the original f 1 cycle o oral teaching (pp . 0

— 9 - 2 N o te . Verses 0 in the last chapter are absent from

MSS R. V. some ancient . (see marginal note, ) The verses referred to differ greatly in style and language from the

r o f o n e est the book , and this account it has be n supposed that they were added by a later hand (possibly with the aid of an independent record) , not long after the publi Of G to v to cation the ospel , in order gi e a suitable close

the narrative . C H A PT E R V

“ TH E G SPE L CC R ING TO sr L KE O A O D . U

1 Au ho sh — o f G . t r ip The authorship the third ospel has scarcely ever been disputed . It has uniformly been L of ascribed to uke, the friend and companion theApostle

Paul . A comparison o f its Opening verses with the preface of of to the Book Acts, and an examination the style two and structure of the books, leave no room for doubt on e that they were written by and the same person . The indications of his personality afforded by certain of passages in the Book Acts, where he joins himself with Paul by the use of the ﬁrst person plural as if he were in his company at the time— viewed in the light o f the information afforded by the Boo k of Acts and the ’ o f P epistles aul , regarding the apostle s personal associates — and his relations with them , justify us in holding that ° the early Church was right in ascribing the authorship 1 to Luke .

1 An e m n on of the re e e c are too numerou xa i ati lativ passag s, whi h s ’ to men o n o ere are on ree o f the o e r ends ti , sh ws that th ly th ap stl s f i n Lu e who cou d e een him on the o cc o s re erred to . l hav b with asi f , viz k , m ema d u ed 2 Tim e u u u and e . B ut J s s J st s , D as D s is isq aliﬁ by . “ 1 0 for em or o o me in o ed re en iv. ( D as f s k , hav g l v this p s t e u m ol h e u u re erred o f t e c rcu c o n . w il J s s J st s is f t as o h i isi ( C . iv ere the on e o o f the ird Go e and o f the Bo o o f c wh as t , b th th sp l k A ts , ou d e d us to u o e the u or Ge e T e de w l l a s pp s that a th was a ntil . h tails ’ are en in Bir H arte A os tolicce . 351 . giv ks p , p 34 TH E N EW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

L ’ With regard to uke s personal history, nearly all that we know of him is connected with the apostolic labours f P H “ o aul . e is referred to by that apostle as the ” 1 e beloved physician (C6 . iv . and it has b en sug ’ gested that it may have been owing to Paul s need of medical attendance that they were ﬁrst brought into

o n n 6 - 1 0 intimate relations with e a other (Acts xvi . ; ’ l 1 3 o f L Ga . iv . Traces uke s profession have been dis ’ covered ia the frequency with which he refers to C hrist s work and that of H is apostles as a min istry of healing 3 5 1 2 . 1 2 6 1 8 . 9 . . (iv . , ix , , x cf also xxii , which tells ’ the n of heali g Of Malchus ear, a fact unrecorded by any of the other three evangelists in their account of the

s technica l incident) , as well as in the occa ional use of and other forms of expression which a physician was likely to

2 . 3 1 . 1 9 8 . employ (iv . ; v ; vi ; xxii

It has been supposed , not without reason , that it is 1 8 “ Luke who is referred to (2 C o r. viii . ) as the brother whose praise in the gospel is spread through all the or churches but whether this be so not, we have in contestable evidence that Luke was not only a warm friend of the apostle but a valuable coadjutor. In the

E pistle to Philemon (ver . which was written during

1 re rd to the r d on Lu e n er e re ed With ga t a iti that k was a pai t , xp ss ' in Ro ssetti s line s

G e onour un o Luke e n e iv h t , va g list, For b e was the nc en e en sa it , a i t l g ds y, ’ Who r u Art to o her n and r ﬁ st ta ght f ld ha ds p ay,

no u or an ue to u or ou not few there is a th ity Of y val s pp t it, alth gh a c re in I are o n to the credu ou the or of Lu e old pi tu s taly sh w l s as w k k . ’ en n er t n er Go e But ou n ot r e . , th gh w itt by a pai t , this is y a pai t s sp l — F ro m co me the our e u ec the r n and C d meo n it fav it s bj ts Vi gi hil , Si , ’ h cen e the o c or in the Tem e the cen on e nder t e S with D t s pl , As si (Al xa s s els Leading Idea s of the Go p ) . 2 We have an an cient memorial o f this belief in the s uperscription “ ” he e e The o e ere to b e en in at the clos e of t pistl . g sp l is h tak a

ener ens e n ot re errin to the Go e Lu e. g al s , as f g sp l by k

36 THE N EW TESTAM ENT AND ITS WRITERS the apostle in the sa me city six or seven years afterwards l 1 5 1 . (see p . , note ) While tradition has always ascribed the third Gospel to L to P uke, it has assigned aul a somewhat similar part in its production to that which Peter bore in relation to S the Gospel of Mark . uch a connection is rendered probable both by what we know o f the relations between P L G aul and uke, and by the character of the ospel itself, which is so liberal an d philanthrOpic in its tone as to form an excellent his toric gro undwork for the doctrine of salva tio n b race throu h a ith y g g f , which was characteristic ’ 2 o f Paul s preaching . There is also a striking similarity between the words attributed to o ur Lord in the ins titu 2 i the Su er . 1 9 0 1 C o r t on o . f pp (xxii , ) and those in xi . 2 4 25 L r P , ( uke having doubtless often hea d aul use the S words in the celebration of the acrament), as well as in ’ the accounts which the two books give o f o ur L ord s

H is Resurre t L ea rances a ter c io n . 1 app f ( uke xxiv C o r.

1 ra er xv . The duty of p y and the inﬂuence of the 3 H ol S irit w G y p , hich ﬁgure so largely in this ospel , are ’ also characteristic of Paul s writings ; and there are certain forms o f expression which are common to them

ld cla ss a ti ea s 3 three o c on o id . 8 1 1 e. . a both , g f iﬁ f (xv , ,

- 2 1 r h l l 1 f. C o . . 1 3 E . 4 5 62 . o . . 7 ix ; xi , ; xiii ; p iv

1 m In The E x os itor 1 895 . 395 Pro e or R p , May , p , f ss a say says ’ That Ren an was right abo u t Luke s E uro p ean and Macedonian o rigin m o o n o f r and ec f I c nno dou . Acts the co G ee o a t bt is p siti a k , sp ially a Macedonian ; its peculiar to ne an d emotion can b e explained or rec te d on no other e app ia vi w . 2 Thi s is the element of tru th lying at the b ottom of the Tubingen eo r h c re re en the rd Go e an em to m n th y, w i h p s ts thi sp l as att pt ag ify n o f he udaiz rs Paul at the e xp e se t J e . 3 e re en e u r n — a H is m 2 1 e or It r p s ts J s s p ayi g t baptis (iii . ) b f e c oo n H is o e . 1 2 1 3 H is trans ﬁ u ration . 2 8 29 h si g ap stl s (vi , ) at g (ix , ) d 34 and co mm en d n H is ir n o H is for H is mur erers (xxiii . ) i g sp it i t ’ F It two r e ncu c n e rne ne ather s hands (xxiii . has pa abl s i l ati g a st ss - 3 the m or un in prayer the appeal to fri en d at midnight (xi . 5 1 ) i p t ate do i 1 The H o iri men oned our me in the wi w (xv ii . ly Sp t is ti f ti s

ﬁr c er . er e 1 5 35 4 1 67 . st hapt , viz at v s s , , , LU E 37 ST. K

’ From his preface we learn that it was Luk e s object to draw up in as complete and consecutive a fe i m as possible an account of the main facts regarding Christ’s

person and work, by reference to the most authentic and H is reliable sources of information . missionary travels with Paul would afford excellent opportunities for collect

ing such information . In particular the two years which ’ he seems to have spent in C aesarea during Paul s deten ’ two of tion by Felix, where he was within days journey o f L G in the shores ake ennesaret, the scene of many ’ ciden ts o u r L to in ord s ministry, would enable him

obtain at ﬁrst hand , from brethren who had been eye

of o witnesses, many th se narratives which are only to be 1 G His h C found in this ospel . hig hristian character

gave him a moral ﬁtness for the work , while his culture and the love o f accuracy manifest in his historical and 2 r o ut topog aphical allusions, marked him as a suitable instrument in the hands o f Providence for writing the Gospel story in a form as well adapted for the philo sophical Greeks as Matthew ’s Gospel was to be for the ’ theocratic Jews and Mark s fo r the practical Romans . 2 Da C m i i n — o f . te of o pos t o The date its composition

6 A . D . . 0 is uncertain It may have been as early as , at the close o f the two years which Luke spent with Paul at ’ C aesarea ; or it may possibly have been d u ring Paul s im

1 NO doubt sometimes delivered orally and s ometimes in the form o f r en n rr e ind c ed in 1 H ence the con r a w itt a ativ , as i at i . . t ast between the Aramaic style o f the Gosp el gen erally ( and of the earlier ’ part of the B ook o f A cts) and the classical Greek o f Luke s own o pen ’ in d d c is nfo m n g e i ation . H i r a t with regard to the Saviour s in fancy and c dho od ma e een n o o er n r e hil y hav b th tha Ma y h rs elf. 2 - E . . in v n d e . 2 1 3 and in the men on of our g gi i g at s (ii , iii . ) ti ' o ur a e en H e e n H is c m But see Savi s g wh b ga publi inistry (iii . “ o o p . 54 ( n the B ok of Acts) The man who in the an xiety an d e r ne of em e uou o e e en in rec e to o b w a i ss a t p st s v yag , v a w k , was abl s erve and record with such demonstrated ac curacy the incidents o f his ad en ure mu b e or o f cred in an c e in c he ed e him v t , st w thy it y as whi h pl g s el to e c re u n e s f hav a f lly i v stigated the facts that he records as true. 38 THE NE W TESTAM ENT AND ITS WRITERS

R 1 - 3 D r 6 6 A . . o so m e prisonment at ome, , even years later

o f but in any case anterior to the Book Acts, as the pre face to the latter implies . ’ har d n — I . f 3 C acter an Co tents St . Matthew s Gospel ’ Messian ic G may be styled the ospel and St . Mark s the ’ L a fi l rea lis tic G St . m t ospel , uke s y be y described as the — ’ ca tho lic Gospel foreshadowing the expansion of God s kingdom in the future as the first Gospel reflects its o hist ry in the past, and the second describes its energy in the present . It is not only more comprehensive in its

t o f range, beginning with the bir h the forerunner and 1 ending with an account of the Ascension , but it also ’ brings out more fully the breadth Of Ch rist s sympathy l Hi and the fu ness and freeness of s love . In illustra tion of this we may note the following po ints : ( 1) The ’ ’ G o fL C ospel uke traces hrist s genealogy, not , as Matthew s to does, by the legal line Abraham, the head of the Jews,

na tu ral line to Ada m of but by the , the head humanity H m (iii . forming thus a ﬁt introduction to the life of i who was to be the Kinsman - Redeemer o f the whole 2 human family . ( ) It exhibits more clearly the reality ’ o f Christ s hu ma nity in the various stages o f human life

- 2 5 1 5 2 4 11 . 2 2 4 . 4 2 1 . 0 . . 7 . (ii , ii , , ii , ii , , , iii and brings into special prominence His dependence upon God o f H is H e in the great crises life , when had recourse 1 2 1 3 2 8 2 1 . . 2 9 H im ra er . to . in p y (iii ; vi , ; ix , ; xxiii 34 , while it inculcates earnestness in prayer by two

5 - 1 3 1 3 parables peculiar to itself (xi . xviii . ( ) In of keeping with this view of it as the gospel humanity, ’ we ﬁnd that it represents C hrist s teaching not so much — in its theocratic as in its human asp ects its usual formula

1 N o information is given with regard to eith er of thes e events in an the o er Go e e ce the re u on to the cen on in y Of th sp ls , x pt ba all si As si the di u ed e o f r . So en the Lord e u sp t passag Ma k ( xvi th J s s, f er he had s oken u n o em rece ed u n o e en an d a t p t th , was iv p i t h av , sat ” h n d of God down at t e right ha . ST. LUK E 39 in the introduction of a parable being no t the kingdo m ” ’ o f in a n heaven is like, as M tthew s, but a certai man “ made a great supper (xiv . a certain man had two ” 4 sons (xv . etc . ( ) It represents Christ as far reachin in H is s m a thies g y p , full of compassion for the oor ff to p , the weak, the su ering, and ready forgive the chief o f sinners . It is in this Gospel we ﬁnd the parables

R L z of The ich Man and a arus (xvi . The Pharisee

P . P Son and ublican (xviii The rodigal (xv . and 4 1 The Two Debtors (vii . It is here we ﬁnd a record ’ of Christ s visit to the house of "acch aeus the publican l f His . o o f (xix ), gracious reception the woman that was

. o f H is His a sinner (vii prayer for murderers (xxiii . and of H is promise of Paradise to the penitent malefactor (xxiii . It is here we ﬁnd the touching story o f the raising to life of the you ng man at the gate

. o f of Nain (vii who was the only son his mother, and she was a widow it is here we are told that Jairns ’ C “ daughter, whom hrist restored to life, was an only 4 daughter (viii . 2) it is here we learn that the de moniac boy whom He healed at the fee t of the Mount of 5 Transﬁguration was an only child (ix . ( ) It is the

G tolera tion and lar e- heartedness ospel of g , embracing within

ama rit 5 1 - 5 an 6 . the range of its sympathy the S (ix . x

25 - 3 1 - 2 1 Gen tile . 25 2 . 8 7 7 . xvii the (iv xiii , the 2 4 5 oor . 7 8 . 20 . 8 . ver oun p (ii , , ; vi ; ix ; xiv the y y g (this being the only Gospel that tells usthat thechildrenbrought “ 1 5 . wea ker and to Jesus were babes, xviii , and the ,

less- honou red sex up to that time, (i . concerning Mary and

3 - 3 - - E . 6 8 1 3 . 3 4 2 2 . 2 8 8 . 7 lisabeth ; ii viii x xxiii , ) “ S It is no accident, therefore, that the words aviour, ” salvation, grace, occur more frequently in this than 1 in any other Gospel ; it is no accident that it represents

1 T e are to b e ound in the ourt Go e bu no i h y f f h sp l, t t at all n e or r Matth w Ma k . 4 0 THE N EW TESTAM ENT AND ITS WRITERS

the Saviour’s birth as heralded by angels 1 to shepherds i watching their ﬂocks by night (ii ; 8 and H s ministry as opening in a despised village o f Galilee with the “ o f gracious words of the evangelic prophet, The spirit L the ord is upon me, because he anointed me to preach ” 1 8 good tidings to the poor (iv . ) it is no accident that as its ﬁrst chapters resound with the voice of praise and for r o f S thanksgiving the bi th the aviour, its closing ’ verses te ll of the disciples joy as they returned to Jeru salem with the blessing of the Ascended Saviour resting

o n d to their hea s, be continually in the temple, blessing ” G is a G od. It bec use this ospel from ﬁrst to last tells the good tidings of great joy which shall be to all the “ people (ii . and proclaims a Saviour who is to be a light for revelation to the Gentiles and the glory of (Thy ” — in people) Israel (ii . whose name repentance and remission of sins should be prea ched unto all the u L nations, beginning from Jer salem (xxiv . uke is

indeed the most evangelical of all the evangelists, and as such he has ﬁtly preserved for us the ﬁrst precious s o f C r germ h istian hymnology, which , after eighteen

u z cent ries, are still pri ed as an aid to worship by almost

l o f C r a l C viz. Ma niﬁca sections the hristian hu ch, the g t 4 6 he t 1. 6 (i . Benedictus ( 8 the Gloria in Excelsis D 2 . 11 11 9 (ii and the N 0 imittis (ii .

to a of G It adds the import nce this ospel, styled by R “ ” enan the most beautiful book in the world, that

- o f e about one third its cont nts is peculiar to itself, con f 5 l— 4 o . 1 sisting mainly chapters ix xviii . , relating to the ’ Saviour s last journey to Jerusalem .

1 r - l m 8 1 4 . I li e n r o f n e o to r and 11 . i ist y a g ls b th Ch ist to His p eo ple is more pro min ent in this than in any o th er Gosp el the sam e ure no ce e in the Book of c in c n e ar m feat is ti abl A ts , whi h a g ls e entioned n - u o mes twe ty t ti . C H A PT E R VI

“ H TH E GOSPEL ACC ORD ING TO ST . JO N

— I n Au h rs i . t 1 . t o h p is a weighty and signiﬁca t fact that until the close of the last century the J Ohan nin e author ship o f the fourth Gospel was never seriously challenged .

E i hanius 380 p p , indeed ( tells us Of a very small C erinthus party who had ascribed it to , a heretical con temporary o f the Apostle John at Ephesus ; but they seem to have had no other reason for rejecting it than D their aversion to its teaching . uring the present century no question has been the subject of more con trovers of m y and scarcely any can be ore importance, considering its close bearing on the doctrinal aspects of

C o n of C . hristianity, and especially the divinity Jesus hrist To a large extent the question is overtaken by the line o f evidence already indicated in connection with the G n o t ospels as a whole (Chap . II . Although quoted by name till late in the second century (by Theophilus), the external evidence fo r this Gospel is in some respects f stronger than for any o the others . It is specially quoted by such early Gnostic writers as Basilides ( 1 25 1 4 5 A . D . Valentinus ( , whose favourite phrases were H eracleon borrowed from its opening verses) , and (a of who disciple Valentinus), wrote a commentary on it — being the ﬁrst known commentary on any part of the 4 2 TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

New Testament . It has also to be born e in mind that John himself survived till near the close of the ﬁrst century, so that a comparatively short interval was left between his death and the time when the four Gospels are known to have been universally accepted by the C 1 85 hurch ( For this interval it so happens that, G apart from the nostic testimony already adduced, we have a direct chain o f testimony consisting of a very few

- Of strong and well c onnected links . At the lower end a one o f the chain we have Iren eus, the most important witnesses to the general reception o f the four Gospels

Born towards the close of the second century . in Asia

i or M nor, where John spent the last twenty thirty years o f L G his life, he became Bishop of yons in aul, which had a close ecclesiastical connection with his native land . Early in life he was brought into familiar contact with P 70 o f olycarp (born a disciple the Apostle John , who was for more than forty years Bishop of Smyrna and w 1 5 - 1 5 6 D her as martyred 5 A . . Among ot allusions which r a to P to I en eus makes olycarp , he says, in a letter his “ friend Florinu s ( 1 7 7 I can describe the very place in which the blessed Polycarp used to sit when b e dis c r ou sed , and his goings out and his comings in , and his f manner o life and his personal appearance, and the dis he cours es which held before the people, and how he would describe his intercourse with John and with the

who L rest had seen the ord, and how he would relate their words . And whatsoever things he had heard from them His P about the Lord and about miracles, olycarp, as having received them from eye - witnesses of the life of l the Word , wou d relate altogether in accordance with the ” Scriptures . It is beyond dispute that this Irenaeus had accepted

the fourth Gospel as a genuine work of the Apostle John . so Is it credible that he would have done , if it had not

4 4 TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS connection with the Council o f Jerusalem (50 as “ ” o n e o f o those who were reputed t be pillars . In his o f 70 later life, after the fall Jerusalem ( according to - a general and well supported tradition , John resided in E C phesus, as bishop of the hurches in Asia Minor which P had been founded by aul , and was banished under Domitian to the island o f Patmos (where he wrote the f R R o e v. . E Book evelation , i returning to phesus in o f the reign Nerva, and living there till after the acces sion o f Trajan ( 98 E now the It was in phesus, which had become chief of C centre hristianity, and was beginning to be infected by the errors o f which Paul had warned its elders at i 2 9 M letus (Acts xx . , that the earliest traditions H e represent John to have written his Gospel . is said to so o n have done the entreaty, and with the subsequent of approval, the Apostle Andrew and other leading e of C h to memb rs the urch, in order supplement the of G teaching the three ospels already published, and to counterac t the errors which were beguiling some from f the simplicity o the faith . Turning now to the evidence of its a uthorship afforded G of by the ospel itself, we may ﬁrst all note the fact that the whole tone o f the book would give one the impression that it was written by some o ne who was fa milia r with the inner life of Chris t and H is ap ostles

- 5 - 5 5 1 1 1 1 2 2 8 2 . 8 68 1 3 . . 6 1. 7 7 7 ( ; ii , , ; iv , , ; vi , , ; 2 1 2 2 1 6 2 1 6 . . . ix . ; xi . ; xii , ; xiii xviii ; This cir cu mstance points to o ne o f the twelve disciples as the — author ia accordance with the statemen t (i . We beheld his glory, glory as of the only begotten from the 24 th Father, and the explicit declaration in the verse Of the last chapter (the whole o f which seems to form a postscript added by the apostle and endorsed by his companions), This is the disciple which beareth wit OH ST . J N 4 5

o f : we ness these things, and wrote these things and ” know that his witness is true As to which o f the 20 disciples is here meant, we ﬁnd a clue in verse of the “ a ha s me c pter, which identiﬁes him with the disciple ” whom Jesus loved , who had been previously referred to P 2 . 7 in xx . , and xxi , in association with eter, and in 2 3 ’ xiii . where he is described as reclining in Jesus

bosom at the Last Supper . The presumption that the o ne of o f " disciple thus designated was the sons ebedee, who were admitted along with Peter (as the other evan gelists tell us) to a closer fellowship with their Master

than the rest of the disciples, is strengthened by the remarkable circumstance that the two brothers are never G mentioned in this ospel , except in the second verse of the last chapter where they are referred to as “ the sons o f "ebedee . The position there assigned to them in the list of disciples is much lower than is G usual in the other ospels, and conﬁrms us in the sup position that it was modesty that led the author to veil

5 - 2 wn 1. 3 4 . 1 5 1 o 6 . 2 6 his name ( xviii , ; xix , as well as that of his brother James and his mother Salome

(whom he nowhere mentions unless at xix . as he is in general very precise and explicit in his mode o f desig As nation . between the two brothers, there can be no to n hesitation in assigning the authorship Joh , since James early fell a victim to the Herodian persecution

4 4 A . D . . (Acts xii G If the ospel was not written by John, it must have been written by some one who wished to pass fo r that

o apostle . But where shall we ﬁnd a writer f the pe st apostolic age possessed o f the intellectual gifts and the spiritual elevation needed for the production o f so sublime a u work , a writer, at the same time, unscrupulous eno gh to r claim for his fab ications, in the most solemn terms, the authority of an eyewitness and apostle who had THE NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS W RITERS

’ reclined in Jesus bo som ? For those who reject the Johannine authorship this amounts to an insuperable 1 difficulty . Besides the allusions to the inner life of Christ His and apostles which have already been referred to, h G o n there may be discerned in t is ospel, a close examina tion , many other tokens of its apostolic origin . ( 1 ) In its account of Christ’s ministry it gives a faith ful picture o f the Messia nic exp ecta tions which existed rio r to among the Jews p the destruction of Jerusalem, as well as of the conﬂict which Christ waged with their

1 9 - 2 8 2 5 of e 1. . . 1 4 hopes t mporal sovereignty ( ; iv vi ,

- 1 2 4 5 3 . o 5 . f 1 vii xi . 7 xix ) while we also ﬁnd traces acquaintance with the Temp le a rrangements of the same

- 3 1 20 2 1 . 1 6 . o . peri d (ii iv , x ( 2) It shows a minute acquaintance with J ewish 2 2 5 . 2 5 5 6 . . cus to ms . 7 ma nn ers (ii iii vii ; xi xix ,

2 2 4 1 4 xv n . 2 2 3 . 8 9 2 7 . . 7 . (iv . , ; vii , ; x ; xi ; ; xix

35 4 1 5 2 . 2 4 . 1 6 1 o in io ns . 6 . 9 and p (i ; vii , , ; ix , ; x frequently giving exp la na tions as if it were written by a

Jew for foreign readers . (3) It also shows a minute acquaintance with the 2 20 . . . 1 8 top ograp hy o f Jerusalem (v ; viii ; ix 7 ; xi . ;

1 3 1 eo v l 1 5 . 7 ra h x iii . , ; xix , , and with the g g p y 2 23 5 8 5 3 . o f P . . . alestine generally (i ; iii ; iv , ; xi

4 circu msta n tial in man o its sta tements ( ) It is y f , and o f graphic in its delineation character, bearing the stamp

1 Fro m the writings of the Apo stles to tho s e o f the Apostolic F e de cen n ro d we ma r er r . e o m ath s is a g at s t Sp aki g b a ly, y say, f the n e ec u l o n o f e the men o f the s ub - o ol c a e e i t ll t a p i t vi w, ( Ap st i g ) hav e un to under nd he e the re i on Dr hardly b g sta t alphab t Of lig ( . A . M . F n We e to o to the our cen ur to the me o f air . airb ) hav g f th t y, ti r t om and u u ine e ore we ﬁn d an C r n r er o m Ch yso s A g st , b f y h istia w it wh ou d no t be urd to re rd c e e en the e of it w l abs ga as apabl , v with h lp the n o c Go e of u n o e er uc d cour e the s e in Sy pti sp ls , p tti g t g th s h is s s as ” F e od The c r c er of the ocr the o urth Go sp el (P ab y) . ha a t Ap yphal

e s in r cu r con rm e . Go sp l , pa ti la , ﬁ s this vi w JOIIN 4 ST. 7 of personal kn owledge such as would be possessed by an

- - 20 6 0 5 2 6 - 24 4 . 1 2 9 35 4 3 . . e e witness . y (i , ii I , ; iv , , ; vi ,

1 0 . 25 1 . . . 6 39 . . 4 0 . x . , xi , , etc ; xii , xviii , etc ; xix , , xx

- I l O, 5 G H ebraic in its ( ) While written in reek , it is st le and s tructure y , abounding in parallels and con tras ts , both in expression and arrangement, and being marked by great simplicity of syntax (e.g. chap . Old and it frequently quotes from the Testament,

H w 1 8 . sometimes directly from the ebre (xiii . ; xix

37 . , etc ) All that can be alleged against the apostolic author Oi G of ship the fourth ospel, on account its marked divergence from the other Gospels in the representation f C ’ fﬁ o hrist s character and teaching, is su ciently met by the fact that “ the synoptical Gospels contain the Gospel

f C of St . G o the infant hurch that John , the ospel in its maturity . The ﬁrst combine to give the wide experience o f the many ; the last embraces the deep mysteries ” n 2 treasured up by the o e . If we suppose the fourth

G 85 A . D . ospel to have been written about , an interval o f more than half a century would thus have elapsed since the death of Christ . During that time Christianity had spread into many lands and furnished subjects for to reﬂection many minds, while the Jewish expectations and prejudices which had clung to many of the early members o f the C hurch had been in a great measure of dissipated by the fall Jerusalem . In these circum stances it was inevitable that the truths o f the Gospel should be viewed in new lights and assume more an d E speculative forms in phesus, as the great meeting O G place Of riental mysticism and reek philosophy, the

1 e n en er we ma to i Go e we are Sp aki g g ally , y say that it is th s sp l chieﬂy indebted for our kn owledge of the individualities of the apostles and o er m no r c r c er th ( i ) ha a t s . 2 ' Westco tt s I n tr d tion to the Stud o s o uc the Go els . 2 53. y f p , p 48 TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

deeper questions and m ore theological aspects o f the new religion would naturally claim a large measure o f atten ’

. f P E tion (C . aul s pistles to the C olossians and the E — C . . phesians haps XV and XVI . ) o ther G We thus see that, as the ospels had reference to distinct types of thought for which they were severally G to adapted, so the fourth ospel was designed meet the dema nd for a more intellectual presentation o f divine v to G truth , which might ser e as an antidote the nostic speculations which were imperilling the recognition at ’ o ne C o f H is time of hrist s divinity, and at another time ’ humanity . In God s providence a worthy exponent of this phase o f the Gospel was found in the aged Apostle s John , who e heart and mind had been so receptive of divine truth even in his youth as to win for him the

o f place closest fellowship with his Master, and who had since then enjoyed the teaching of the Holy Spirit for a o f longer period than any his fellows, and amid more intellectual surroundings, and was thus singularly ﬁtted for the great tas k which Providence had assigned to 1 him . — - 5 A . D . Da of m . 8 90 2 . te C sition o p o , as indicated above . — 3. Character and Contents Many of the remarks that might have been made under this head have already found place in this chapter, and in the general discussion o f G a the ospels, where a contr st is drawn between the On Synoptics and the fourth Gospel . the whole perhaps no ﬁtte r epithet can be found for this Gospel than that

1 The hi er oc o on and re um e er educ on gh s ial p siti , , p s ably, b tt ati , ’ o n an d ro er ud n r m his er c rcum nce o f J h his b th (j gi g f o fath s i sta s, his ’ n ac u n ance the i r e and mo er re ue perso al q ai t with h gh p i st, his th s q st fo r her two sons that they might sit the one o n the right hand and the o th er o n the left hand o f the Saviour in H is kingdom ) are perhaps n ot without signiﬁcance in this co nn ection as helping to acco unt for his “ er n e ec u m e c ed him to b e the Plate of wid i t ll t al sy pathi s , whi h ﬁtt T ” the welve. OH ST. J N 4 9

applied to it by Clement o f Alexandria at the close of the

iz l v . s iritua G second century, the p ospel . It may also doctrina l or theo lo ica l G be described as the g ospel . It represents Christ’s person and work not with special to P P or reference the ast, or the resent, the Future ; E P but generally with reference to ternity, in which ast,

P . resent, and Future are alike included Its great theme is set forth in the Prologue or Intro 1 of w duction (i . which strikes the keynote the hole G C ospel, representing hrist as the Manifestation of the S in divine Being, the only ource of life and light, human 1 h o ne o f form, and , as suc , the Object, on the hand , on o ther o f saving faith , and the occasion , the hand, the ’ w world s unbelief . The hole book is an elaboration of o u t this sublime thought, wrought with a singular union — of depth and si mplicity in close historical relation with L ’ the ord s visits to Jerusalem at the national feasts, when

H e H is R o f had occasion to press claims, as the evealer of the Father, upon the teachers religion , in connection

with the national expectation of the Messiah . This revelation , attested by various forms of divine witness w bearing (including miracles, which are al ays called ” G C ’ signs in this ospel , as expressions of hrist s glory), “ 3 - 40 may be said to reach a climax in xii . 7 ( These things spake Jesus, and he departed and hid himself from h u t em . But tho gh he had done so many signs before

not on . them, yet they believed him The remainder o n o ne of the book depicts, the hand , the downward ’ o f the course the world s unbelief leading to cruciﬁxion ,

1 “ “ . 1 : the ord God. . 1 4 : the Word ec me i W was i b a ﬂ esh . It matters little ho w far the ap ostle was indebted to Philo o r other “ philo sophising Jews for the use of the word logo s as a term o f

eo o . I n an c e he e the ord an en re new c on th l gy y as , gav w ti ly appli ati conn ec n the I nc rn on u n u me n o f by ti g it with a ati , si g it th s as a a s ’ r n n God ne rer in er on en e nst e d of s ecu atin ou b i gi g a a p s al s s , i a p g ab t H im in the re o n of an c o gi abstra t theol gy . 4 50 TH E NEW TESTAM ENT AND ITS WRITERS

the r ’ i and on othe , the perfecting of the disciples fa th , which attains its ﬁnal and typical expression in the slowly - matured but deep - rooted confession of the doubting “ L Go d Thomas, My ord and my (xx . G As already indicated , the fourth ospel contains very of G few incidents the ministry in alilee . In this respect, 2 w . 3 4 0 as ell as in many of its unexplained allusions (i ,

5 I 3 24 . 62 70 . iii . , , ; vi , ; xx it takes for granted 1 r acquaintance with the ea lier Gospels . The matter which it contains in common with the three other Gospels is very of m os t limited in extent, but the profound signiﬁcance, viz. the Miraculous Feeding of the Multitude and the

Death and Resurrection of Christ . A cruciﬁed and risen S who H aviour can say of imself, I am the bread of life to he that cometh me shall not hunger, and he that o n h — believeth me shall never t irst, this is the essence o f G the o f C the four ospels, as it is essence hristianity ’ symbo lised in the Lord s Supper ; and the ﬁnal Object o f the whole New Testament is summed up by the last of “ a the apostles when he s ys, These are written , that ye C Son of God may believe that Jesus is the hrist, the and that, believing, ye may have life in his name

(xx .

1 In keeping with this is the fac t that many lo ng intervals are

r e een the e the P o er . 4 an d he passed o ve ; e. g . b tw f ast Of ass v (vi ) t o ern c e dur n c me the e n e ex feast f Tab a l s (vii . i g whi h ti va g list “ ” m n o n e u ed in G lee pressly e ti s that J s s walk ali .

52 TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

great part ﬁctitious, which was designed to bridge over P the gulf between aul and the rest of the apostles . E if ven this theory could be proved to be correct, it would not get rid of the supernatural element to which

these critics have such an aversion , for in the passages thus admitted to be genuine there are statements that 1 8 2 6 8 imply miraculous occurrences (xvi . , ; xxviii . , But in reality there is no sufficient evidence to warrant h s uc . to e a view With regard ext rnal testimony, we find in some o f the earliest Christian writers (C lement of R 1 P H . ome, Ignatius, olycarp, ermas, Justin Martyr, etc ) not a few expressions which seem to reproduce the — “ ” language o f this book drawn not only from the we f sections but from other parts o it as well . The impres sion thus made upon us in favour o f the book as it now stands is confirmed by finding it in the Syriac and Old

L s a C . atin Ver ions, and also in the Muratori n anon But it is the internal character Of the book that affords

the best refutation o f the theory in question . A minute ’ and critical examination of the accoun t of Paul s mission L ary journeys before uke joined him (Acts xiii . , xiv . ) has recently led an accomplished scholar and archaeologist to “ o r the conclusion that it is founded on , perhaps actually e im incorporat s, an account written down under the P ” 2 e f . mediate inﬂuence aul himself Moreover, with a to o f o r few exceptions, due the variety sources, oral e w o writt n , from which the author dre , the bo k has a natural unity of diction and style which forbids us to to o ne assign it more than author, and its several parts are so interlaced by correspondin g observations and

1 in 1 E i ere re roduc on of c s x . 22 in E . . his . . g p xvi i th is a p ti A t iii , m i i nd Ps 2 0 dd 1 4 a . . on of om n on o f 1 Sa . . its c bi ati x i lxxxix , its a iti “ ” he r s e s on of e e an d its u o n to the d n e tes timon . t ph a J ss , all si ivi y m In the Greek the res emblance is even ore striking. 2 Profess or R m The Church in the R o man E m ire . 6 . a say, p , p THE ACTS OF TH E APOSTLES allusions as to conﬁrm us in the belief that it fo rms o ne 1 consistent whole . That it is a work o f the ﬁrst century may be inferred from the fact that it does not contain the slightest ’

P . allusion to St. aul s epistles In the second century these epistles were so widely circulated that no historian ’ giving a sketch of Paul s life - work could ha ve passed them over in silence . But during the greater part of the period covered by the Book o f Acts they were not yet in existence ; and for some years they would be very little known except in the Churches to which they were ad in dressed . There is no notice taken of them the Book of Acts, nor is there any echo of their teaching ; while there is a remarkable absence of information on several important points mentioned in them which would n atur ally have called for recognition had they been familiar l ’ 1 . a 2 of e . G . . . 1 1 r to the writer this book ( g i 7 ii C o . xi . But although there is no sign o f acquaintance with the epistles themselves, there are, as we shall see when “ undesi ned we come to deal with these writings, many g ” coincidences between statements contained in them and of in the Book Acts, which can only be accounted for by the fact that the writers, in both cases, were guided by a f r strict regard o truth . It has also to be noted that while there is no sign of ’ P ul acquaintance with a s letters, there is in the speeches attributed to him an admitted resemblance to his style ’ and diction , which is best accounted for by the writer s having been present at the delivery of the speeches, or

1 Cf. . 5 ii . 4 0 8 v 1 xx n . n . 58 . . 20 . 5 . 1 6 vi , vi , xxi ; , viii , ; i , xi ’ (a saying o f our Lo rd s b ei ng here twice quoted which does not o ccur in an the ou Go e r . 4 7 . 8 1 x. 30 . 2 5 etc . I n The y Of f sp ls) x , xv , xi , E xp ositor of January 1 894 Pro fesso r Ramsay says The more clo sely c cru n ed the more c e r do the un and ﬁrst - nd A ts is s ti is , l a ly ity ha ” c r c er of the n rr e n ha a t a ativ sta d out. 54 TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

having received an authentic report of them . It is interesting in this connection to o bserve that the speech which Paul delivered in H ebrew on the stairs of the ca stle in Jerusalem (xxii . 1 and which was no doubt translated into its present Greek form by Luke (judging ’ from the number o f Luke s favourite words to be found P in it) , is far less auline in character than the speech at 2 2 . G Athens (xvii which was spoken in reek , and was in to L P all probability reported uke by aul himself . We may add that this latter speech is not only Pauline ’ in its diction , but reﬂects very plainly the apostle s o f S training in the schools Tarsus, where the toic philo sophy was in great repu te . We have a similar token of genuineness in the harmony between the speeches o f Pete r reported in this book and the ﬁrs t epistle written 1 by that apostle . Of the writer’s accuracy in matters of fact abundant evidence can be adduced . In the titles which he gives to the magistrates o f the various cities he has occasion to o f mention , he is supported by the testimony ancient

co in s i writings, , and inscr ptions in a most remarkable “ olitarchs of manner ; e. g . the name Of p ( rulers the which he applies to the magistrates of Thessa

lo nica . (xvii though otherwise unknown , has been discovered o n an arch still in comparatively good pre f 2 H i servation in the principal street o the city . s many allusions also to historical characters and conditions that are otherwise known to us, are almost invariably found 3 to be true to fact ; while the precision of his nau tical

1 1 1 and 1 Pe er 11 d 1 Pe er . 2 2 0 o . . f . 23 . 2 8 an C . ii , iv , t i , als iv t

- 4 8 . 2 m r n nce are o und . 7 . 1 2 2 0 . 1 2 Si ila i sta s f at xiii xvi , ; xviii ; ’ See mo n I n trodu ction . 34 8 349 . xxviii . 7 . Sal s , pp , 3 or e m e Profess or R m rem r the im iortance F xa pl , a say a ks that i “ he o u G n C urc e in c . i . assigned to t s th alatia h h s , haps xii , xiv , is ” - 4 A D and not to r me e . histo rically true to the p eriod 4 8 6 . . lat ti h r of the u mu in the em e of n the me Re ferring to t e sto y t lt t pl Dia a, sa TH E ACTS OF TH E APOSTLES 5 5

expressions and minute geograp hica l allusio ns in his P ’ account of aul s voyage and shipwreck , has been found so remarkable as to form the subject o f a special disserta 1 tion . As a last token of genuineness m a be mentioned the fact that in the Book Of Acts the poysitions taken up by the Pharisees and Sadducees respectively with reference ’ to Christ s cause are almost the reverse of wha t they are l in the Gosp e . This change of attitude was due to the ’ o f R n apostles preaching the esurrectio , after their ’ to f Master s departure, which was ﬁtted give Of ence to the Sadducees alone but it is a circumstance which only a contemporary would have been likely to realise and

represent in such a vivid manner. Da e of C m osi i n — 2 . t o p t o With regard to the date of — its composition , its abrupt termination leaving us in ignorance of Paul ’s fate and of his subsequent labours (if he was set free from his imprisonment at Rome) - has led some to suppose that the author brou ght up his narrative to the very moment when b e closed the book and despatched it to his friend Theophilus . In that case ’ 3 A D . it must have left the writer s hands about 6 . But it may be that the work was broken o ff owing to ’ L o r V m uke s death, he may have had it in iew to co plete his o r narrative in another volume, he may have felt it Y V dangerous to go farther . et another iew is that the apostle’s preaching at Rome was purposely selected by the writer as a suitable ﬁnish to his narrative of the ’ On C . hurch s progress the whole, we may be content with the assurance that it was written by a contemporary

and companion of the apostle .

“ wr er T ere onl one o f n er re in and it says , h is y way i t p t g it, that is as em od n lmo if n o t o u e verbatim the ord o f an e e b yi g a st, abs l t ly, , w s y ” e wi tn ss . 1 Vo d h a e an S i wr k S a l me m E s F R. ec o t. P u . S y g p f , by Ja s S ith , q , o f ordanh J ill. 56 TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

n — ke n e 3 . Charact er a d Cont ents The y ot of the book is struck in the commissio n given by the risen Lord to 8 h n H is . w apostles (i ) But ye s all receive power, he the H oly Ghost is come upon you : and ye shall be my wit

u daea S r a nesses, both in Jerusalem, and in all J , and ama i , ” r and unto the utte most part of the earth . The entire book reco rds the fulﬁlment o f this prophecy . It may be roughly divided into three parts corresponding to the widening spheres o f labour which were thus indicated “ l 3 “ Jerusalem (i . all Jud aea and Samaria “ ” - (viii ix) unto the uttermost part o f the earth (x. xxviii .) Each of the three is marked by a nota ble o ut

- 4 1 4 i H S . 1 4 pouring o the oly pirit (ii ; viii . 7 x . Throughout the whole narrati ve p rominence is given to the L ord J esus Chris t o f , as the subject apostolic

2 1 3- 1 5 32 2 3 . . 31 4 5 testimony (ii . ; iii ; v , , ; viii . ; x .

36 as the bestower o f the Holy Spirit (ii . with 1 6 34 His miraculous gifts (iii . ix . ) and divine guidance 2 4 1 9 6 (1. ; x . xvi . as personally visible to the martyr Stephen (vii . and as the personal agent in ’ 3 Paul s conversion (ix . ’ There is great signiﬁcance in the description of Luke s G of ospel , given in the opening verse this book, as a treatise con cerning all that Jesus began both to do to and teach, until the day in which he was received ” “ ” of up . The position the word began is very em to of phatic in the original , as if imply that the Acts the ’ Apostles formed a continuation of Christ s work . The writer conceives o f H im as still carrying on His work in virtue of His Resurrection and Ascension ; and in the introduction to the book he refers to these events as

- His . l l l well as to the prediction of second Advent (i ) . The continuity o f the divine work is indeed the ru ling G idea o f the whole book . The ospel kingdom is described as advancing steadily onwards, beginning at Jerusalem TH E ACTS OF TH E APOSTLES 57

(in the same upper room , perhaps, as had been the scene o f L S R the ast upper), and extending finally to ome , the great metropolis of the Gentiles . More than half the book is devoted to the labours of the Apostle of the G o f re entiles, and three his missionary journeys are — ad corded with Antioch for his he quarters, where the “ ” disciples were first called C hristians (xi . Of necessity it is a mere selection of incidents that is f P 2 r o . C o . . given , both as regards the labours aul (cf xi 2 4 and the history of the Church during the thirty h three years or more over which t e book extends . The selection was no doubt determined partly by the infe r mation which Luke had gathered from his own Observa 1 - o r w tion as an eye witness from trust orthy reporters, and partly by the great object he had in view, namely, to trace the gradual expansion of the C hurch from its first beginnings 2 as a seeming phase of Judaism to its full development as a catholic communion , in which G there was to be no distinction between Jew and entile, Law and where the , on which the former prided himself 3 race f so greatly, was to be superseded by the g o God f freely of ered in the Gospel .

1 he ccoun of th m on in m r an . t e d e E g. a t issi Sa a ia lsewhere in m n d r c . ou d no dou b e e ed ro m P li hap . viii w l , bt, ai ly iv f hi p , with

- om the r er . 8 1 0 had en m n d C ae re c wh w it (xxi ) sp t a y ays at sa a , whi h had also been the scene of the notable events relating to the admission of Corne u the cen ur on recorded in c li s t i , hap . x . 2 “ It tells u s of the first apostolic miracle ; the first ap osto lic s ermon ; the first beginnings of ecclesiastical organ isation ; the first pers ecutio n ; the first martyr ; the first Gentil e co nvert ; the first eccl esiastical syno d ; the first missio n j ourney ; the first Europ ean urc F rr r Mess es o the B o ks c a o . h h ( a a , g f ) 2 o ur e ord o u d P u . L e an . A fav it w b th with St k St a l . C H A PT E R VIII

TH E E PISTLES

P aul— H i Previ H The Ep istles of St. s ous istory

The E ist es — One 1 . p l of the distinguishing character istics o f the New Testament as compared with all other

' sa cred books in the world is the ep istolary character of a large part o f its contents .

w - o ne ff It contains t enty letters by six di erent authors .

f to C iz o v . Nine these are addressed individual hurches, l 2 a 1 2 C G and Thess lonians, and orinthians, alatians, P 2 R C . omans, hilippians, olossians, John (see chap P 1 2 to viz. ﬁve individual persons, hilemon , and Timothy,

3 two H w C iz v . Titus, John and to ebre hristians, H ebrews and James the remaining ﬁve being of a more

iz. E o r v . less general nature, phesians (see chap 2 P 1 I e . and et r, John , and Jude

Besides these, we have reason to believe from the

f 2 r r nature o the case ( C o . xi . as well as f om special 1 2 Co r. . 9 . allusions ( v ; Thess iii . that there were o h other apost lic letters whic have not been preserved . That Providence should have suffered such inspired writings to perish is in no degree more remarkable than ’ that so many of o ur Lord s o wn words should have passed into oblivion and we can readily understand that during

60 TH E NEW TESTAME NT AND ITS WRITERS

o f Timothy) very near the close his life, approaching

6 . 8 A D . In the interval were produced two other groups of — ’ epistles the se designed to vindicate Paul s apostolic r G f authority, and prese ve the ospel from the inroads o l 2 a viz. C G R Jud ism, and orinthians, alatians, and omans r 5 7 (written during his thi d missionary journey, about

5 8 E z o f vi . and the pistles the Imprisonment, P C P E hilippians, olossians, hilemon , and phesians, written

- R m 62 63 A . D from o e about . The most o f them were probably collected and in more o r less general use in the C hurch within a short ’ time after the apostle s death , as we may infer from the traces o f them to be found in the writings o f Clement o f Rome (95 Ignatius (died 1 1 0- 1 1 5 and Poly

- 1 5 5 - 1 5 1 1 5 . D 6 a e 0 1 1 A . c rp (wrot , died In o ur New Testament the Pauline epistles are ar to ranged according their length and importance, but there is an obvious advantage in studying them in their chrono lo ical o rder ro res g , as it enables us to trace the p g ’ sive development of the apostle s theology and the growth e r to of his lit ary style, as well as realise the circumstances o u t o f which the epistles successively arose . It is a circumstance worth noting as an explanation in some meas ure o f the occasional abruptness and irregu ’ larit o f y the apostle s style (and perhaps of its vivacity), that his letters were usually written by an amanuensis to — dictation , the salutation only being written with his 1 wn o ui . o hand, as a t ken Of gen neness — 1 2 The undis uted E is s of St . Paul 3. p p tle and C i R a G or nthians, om ns, and alatians have the distinction of being almost universally admitted to be genuine

writings of Paul .

1 r 1 o 2 1 and C ol. 8 Gal xvi 2 2 1 C . . i 1 f Rom . . . . V 1 C . ; xvi iv ; . m n r 111 1 P e o ve . 1 9 . 2 Thess . . 7 ; hil , TH E EPISTLE S 6 1

This admission is a most important one from an

eviden tia l point of view , as these epistles form a valuable histori cal link between the earliest preaching of the

u r G apostles and the composition o f o four ospels . They contain a great many references to detailed matters of

c G fa t mentioned in the ospels, and prove that the story ’ o f C r hrist s death and resur ection , as told in the four ’ f P 1 C r G o o . osp els, was the chief theme aul s preaching (

- 23 1 8 . xv . xi ’ o ur L With regard to ord s resurrection in particular, they prove that event to have been generally believed in P ’ by the Church in St . aul s time and to have been from

1 C o r the ﬁrst the basis of the apostle s preaching ( . xv . 1 They also imply the exercise o f supernatural

ad powers by the apostle himself, as a fact generally mitted and not likely to be called in question even by 1 1 those who were opposed to him ( 2 C o r. xii . and they show the existence in the Church Of spiritual gifts o n m - deﬁn ed a large scale and with any well variations, that were commonly regarded as the result of super

1 r xii - natural inﬂ uence ( C o . xiv We are thus in a great measure independent o f the four Gospels for our knowledge o f the original truths and principles of Christianity ; and we have in the epistles a practical refutation of the mythical theories which would attribute the supernatural elements in o ur G of ospels to the gradual growth legend in the Church . The evidence derived from the epistles is all the more u val able because it is indirect, the letters having mani festl w y been written without any such object in vie . It has to be noted to o that they are addressed to several n independent communities far removed from o e another . One of these communities (the Church in Rome) had received its C hristianity from another source than the two C G apostle, while in the others ( orinth and alatia) 62 THE NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

there were opponents to criticise his statements, as well to as friends sympathise with him . In these circum stances falsehood o r error with reference to important o f matters fact was extremely improbable . To this we may add that the letters are evidently the productions o f a man whose sincerity is as great as his intellectual of acuteness and sobriety judgment, and who, from his early association with the Jewish authorities at Jerusalem , was in a position to know all “ that could be said against o f C the alleged facts hristianity . too to Altogether, it is not much say that a study o f these epistles leads inevitably to the conclusion that ’ Paul s gospel had the same historical g roundwork as the gospel preached at the present day— that groundwork consisting o f the same essential and well - attested facts regarding C hrist’s life and teaching as we ﬁnd recorded in the four Gospels . ’ — 4 . . ul s R n St Pa s previous Hi tory . egardi g the pre vio u s o f life the author, the following brief statement may P S suffice . aul (originally called aul) was born within a ’ o ur L few years after ord s nativity, in the city of Tarsus H is C . in ilicia, a famous seat of classical learning father, R z o f H though a oman citi en , was ebrew descent, and brought up his son in the strictest observance of the

Jewish law . Trained at Jerusalem under the renowned G S Pharisaic teacher amaliel , aul became thoroughly R versed in abbinical literature, and was equally distin z H guished for his learning and his eal . e was among o f C the earliest and ﬁercest persecutors the hristians, whom he regarded as apostates from the religion of their fathers and it was while he was o n his way to Damascus in the execution o f a warrant from the high pri e st that

34 - 3 A D he was suddenly converted ( 7 . . ) by the direct im interposition o f the Risen Christ . From H he received to G G a special commission preach the ospel to the entiles, TH E E PISTLES 63 and in His service he continued with unflinching courage to and devotion , in spite of calumny and persecution ,

o f . the last hour his life After about eight years , spent in S partly retirement, partly in preaching in yria and

C 4 4 A . D . old ilicia , he joined (about ) his friend Barnabas, “ ” - o r h a liberal minded evangelist apostle, at Antioc , which was soon to become the great centre o f missionary enterprise for the early Church . In company with P Barnabas, aul made his ﬁrst missionary journey (about C o f 4 8 through yprus and part Asia Minor, and attended the C ouncil at Jerusalem (about 50 to advocate the cause of the Gentile converts in their o f struggle against the bigotry their Jewish brethren . In the following year he started o n his second and more o f extensive missionary tour, in the course which, under to E the divine guidance, he crossed over urope, found of C h o f ing a number hurches there, among others t at H 5 2 e C A . D . Thessalonica . reached orinth in , from o f which, as we shall presently see, he wrote the ﬁrst 1 his epistles that have been preserved to us, namely and

2 Thessalonians . C H A PT E R IX

1 AND 2 TH ESSALON IANS

“ TH E FIRST E PISTLE o r PAUL TH E APOSTLE ” To TH E TH ESSALON IANS

A tho shi — 1 . u r p There is ample external evidence to prove that this epistle was acknowledged to be a genuine f St P o f writing o . aul in the second quarter the second century , while expressions apparently borrowed from it d are to be found in writings of a still earlier ate .

The few critics, headed by Baur, who have called its

0 11 u genuineness in question have done so internal gro nds, alleging against it both its likeness and its unlikeness to the other epistles o f Paul . But its unlikeness is satis factorily accounted for by the comparatively early date of its composition , and the very exceptional nature of the occas ion on which it was written ; while its likeness is largely due to the habit of repetition which is a marked e Of charact ristic the apostle, and, in particular, to the n o f germinatio , at this early period , ideas more fully

his . developed in subsequent writings Moreover, the w resemblance bet een this and other writings of St . Paul is often so subtle and minute— depending on the play of 1 f or o n personal feeling and af ection for his converts,

1 - - m 1 2 Cor. 1 1 20 . 6 1 0 and Ro . . 3 . 6 . . f. 11 . 1 C 7 , iii , i , i , xiii l THESSALONIANS 65

1 o f — characteristic peculiarities style, as to preclude the

idea of forgery . The language o f the epistle with reference to the Second C oming o f C hrist is also at variance with the

supposition of forgery . It seems to imply an expectation 0 11 the part of the apostle that he would live to see that 1 5 event (iv . But such an expectation was not likely to be introduced by a forger when it had already ’ — been falsiﬁed by the apostle s death , as it must have

been , long before forgery could have been successfully

attempted . In this connection we may also note the apparent discrepancy between the statements in Acts 3 5 I . . o f xviii . and Thess i regarding the movements

Timothy, into which a forger depending for his informa tion on the Book of Acts would not have been likely to fall , and which can only be accounted for by supposing a journey o f Timothy (from Athens or Bereea to Thessa lonica) left unrecorded in the Book o f Acts . There is a 9 similar discrepancy between chapter i . , which speaks “ o f the converts as having turned from their idols, and 4 Acts xvii . , as the latter would lead us to suppose that the C hurch o f Thessalonica was largely composed o f Jews 2 1 1 8 . . 7 and proselytes In ii , there is a reference to the apostle’s disappointment in not being able to carry out

h ia his intention of revisiting his converts, but suc an tention is nowhere mentioned in the Book of Acts . All the three variations may be regarded as a proof that the epistle

1 E . . cur or e uence of ou 1 2 the com n on o f g a s y s q th ght ( . bi ati mi n con r e f 2 r ee r . 6 c . C o . . 1 C ol. 1. 1 1 er co s g t a i s (i , viii , , v bal n

r . 1 7 . 7 cf. 1 C or. . 3 2 C or. . 1 The orce o f t asts (ii ; iv , v , v , f thes e arguments cann ot b e fully understood with ou t a knowledge o f the or n owett vol 1 9 igi al (J , . i . pp . 2 The difﬁcu ma b e met do n e d n of c xvn 4 lty y by a pti g a r a i g A ts . ound n m i o e . and o o ed in the u e n me that is f s MSS is f ll w V lgat , a ly, “ ” of the de ou ro e e and the Gree re mu ude or v t (p s lyt s) ks a g at ltit , by suppo sing that the apostle preached to the Gentiles after the three - d men n in s o ed c . 2 Sabbath ay ti A ts xvii . TH E N EW TESTAM ENT AND ITS WRITERS

i of was wr tten independently the Acts, and that their general harmony is due to their common ﬁdelity to facts .

. C f 2 The Readers . Unto the hurch o the Thessa ” a lonians . Thess lonica was then, as it is still (under the o f S name aloniki), an important mercantile emporium, at o f G the head the Thermaic ulf, with a considerable proportion of Jewish inhabitants sharing in its general ne w E prosperity . It is the second city of uropean Turkey in the time of the apostle it was the capital of f Macedonia . It lay in the neighbourhood o Mount O o f laCe lympus, the fabled home the gods, and was a p of

C z exile for icero, who tells how he ga ed up at the sacred summit but saw nothing save snow and ice .

C o f P The hurch Thessalonica was planted by St . aul 5 o f 2 A . D in the course his second missionary tour in .

l - l l P (Acts xvii . ) , after his memorable visit to hilippi . His to stay in Thessalonica seems have been short, owing to i o f a r sing the mob, stirred up against him by the Jews but it was long enough for the Philippians to send ” P P once and again unto his need ( hil . iv . reviously

’ h o wn 9 T- ad . 2 he been earning his bread (ii ; hess . iii .

7 8 - of , ) doubtless in the exercise his calling as a tent “ o ne maker (Acts xviii . as of the staple manufactures ’ - The o f the city was and is goats hair cloth . sound that follows the ear as o ne walks through the streets of Saloniki to day is the wheezing and straining vibration of the loom and the pendulum - like click o f the regular ” 1 P and ceaseless shuttle . aul paid a second visit to the place shortly before his last j o urney to Jerusalem . The

r was G Chu ch mainly entile, as we may infer not only from God f its members having turned unto rom idols (i . but also from the fact that the epistles addressed to it do Old not contain a single quotation from the Testament . Thessalonica played a great part in the history of

1 ’ T s men t . 1 o d I n troduction to the N ew e ta 53. D s , p

TH E NEW TESTAM ENT AND ITS WRITERS

o f to re a fulﬁlment the desire, which he feels intensely, visit them for the perfecting of that which is lacking in ” (their) faith, and that meanwhile their spiritual life may be developed and Strengthen ed (iii 1 0 With this view of he exhorts them (iv . ) to the cultivation certain virtues

1 9 vv . vv. vv. purity ( brotherly love ( , industry ( l 2 — n l l . , ) which they were in danger of eglecting of The characteristic feature this epistle, however, as to of that which follows, is the prominence it gives ’ Christ s Second C oming . This had been a main theme ’ o f P l s 1 0 au s preaching when he was in Thes alonica (i .

1 2 . ii . cf Acts xvii . and it had so taken possession o f his hearers that the bereavements they had suffered by the death of relatives since the apostle left them , were chieﬂy mourned because they thought the departed ’ friends would have no share in the glory o f the Saviour s

o P 1 3- 1 8 Advent . The c mfort which aul administers (iv . ) when he assures his converts that their fears in this matter are groundless, gives one the idea that he expected w C hrist to come in his o n lifetime . In this respect the language o f this epistle differs widely from the allusions

2 C r to his approaching death in his later epistles ( o . v . I

1 - 24 2 2 . . Phil . i . Tim iv That the apostle should have been left to his own impressions in this matter is in ’ “ ou r Lo striking harmony with rd s statement, But of t o ne hat day and hour knoweth no , not even the angels ” o f So n heaven , neither the , but the Father only (Matt . 36 f o o . 1. xxiv . , Acts That it w uld come suddenly and called for constant watchfulness was a truth often

C r dwelt upon by h ist, which the apostle could safely 1 o . enf rce, as he does in this epistle (v

1 ’ With regard to the arrangem ent o f to pics in this the earliest o f Paul s r n com e do n to us we can r ce the order ma b e w iti gs that has w , t a that y

d to be c r c er c o f e e ener l . : 1 u on 2 sai ha a t isti his pistl s g a ly, viz ( ) Sal tati , ( ) anks ivin andPr er 3 Doc r n I n ru c on 4 Pr c c E or Th g g ay , ( ) t i al st ti , ( ) a ti al xh ta d n u n n d on 5 Per on e e 6 C onc u o a B ened c on . ti , ( ) s al M ssag s , ( ) l i g Sal tati i ti 2 TH ESSALONIANS 69

“ THE SE C OND E PISTLE o r PAUL TH E APOSTLE ” To TH E TH ESSAL ON IAN S

Aut sh — We the 1 . hor ip have same external evidence of for the genuineness of the second epistle as the ﬁrst . Internally it bears evidence of being a sequel to the the P other, being written , like it, in name of aul and S ilas and Timothy (i . and containing a direct allusion to the previous epistle (ii . As might have been w expected, it contains fe er and more distant allusions to ’ the apostle s sojourn in Thessalonica, although it expressly recalls the teaching he had then imparted regarding the “ revelation of the man of sin . As regards style and language it exhibits many Pauline peculiarities in com me n with the ﬁrst epistle .

r h 1 - 1 2 The p ep etic passage in chapter 1 1 . has been a

u - n st mbling block to ma y critics, who have imagined it to

of . bear the stamp a later period In reality, however, of it is quite consistent with the teaching the ﬁrst epistle, which nowhere implies that the coming of C hrist was to to be immediate, although it was be sudden and was ’ Pr apparently to take place in the apostle s lifetime . e dictions of a similar kind had been uttered by our Lord

Himself (Matt . and were also to be found in the b f D E z ooks o aniel and ekiel . — The Rea r See 66 . 2 . de s page Dat d — r 3. e an Place of Compos ition As above e marked, this epistle, like the ﬁrst, is written in the name P S o f . aul, ilas, and Timothy The three were together at C o f in orinth , and apparently, so far as the Book Acts u s forms , nowhere else . This leads to the inference that this epistle, like the ﬁrst, was written from that city probably a few months later . In the interval the excite ment and disorder at Thessalonica consequent upon the 70 TH E NEW TESTAM ENT AND ITS W RITERS

’ of C expectation hrist s coming, in the midst of the perse o e to uti n which the converts were exposed, had grown ’ even more serious, and demanded the apostle s attention 1 5 6 6 ( . ; ii . ; iii . h r r — 4 . C a acte and Cont ent s Along with an expression of satisfaction with their continued faith and steadfastness in f f 1 the midst o their persecutions and af lictions (i . Paul assures the Thessalonians that Christ will infallibly to come vindicate their cause, rendering vengeance to “ His and their enemies, and at the same time to be ” 5 glorified in his saints (i . But he warns them against being carried away with the idea— due in some measure to a misconstruction of his o wn teaching or to the 2 o f . 1 circulation a forged epistle bearing his name (ii , ’ 1 — C o iii . 7 that hrist s c ming was immediately to take H e place . mentions that certain great events must first 3 exh0 1t s to come to pass (ii . and them the exercise o f continued patience in the strength o f divine grace 1 3 in (ii . bidding them lead a quiet, honest, and dus trio u s i o f life , such as he had g ven an example while he “ c was yet with them, and ommanding them to withdraw (themselves) from every brother that walketh disorderly ” 6 (iii . The characteristic passage of the epistle is that which deals with “ the falling away ” that must “ come first ’ 1 before Christ s appearing (ii . Its meaning has the o f been subject endless controversy, owing to the “ attempts which have been made to identify the man o f ” “ ” restraineth n e w sin , and the one that , with historical

r dynasties o persons . For the former there have been

o P L suggested Ner , Mahomet, the ope, uther, Napoleon R E G m E for the latter the oman mpire, the er an mpire,

P . C laudius, and even aul himself But the truer inter protation seems to be to regard the expressions in — questi o n as referring to two great tendencies the on e 2 TH ESSALONIANS 7 1

antichristian , in the form of secular ambition , which was all that the ho pe o f a Messiah then amounted to in many

o f Jewish minds, and the other political , in the form the civil power, represented in the ﬁrst instance by the o f Roman Empire . The breakdown the civil power before S the aggressive march of an ungodly ocialism, under the leadership perhaps of some one realising on a gigantic scale the antichristian feeling and ambition of the age, may be the signal fo r the Advent of the true C hrist in 1 His heavenly power and glory .

1 The obscurity of the passage is partly due to its prephetic c r c er r to the need for c u on in an reference to the ha a t , pa tly a ti y s n ere of the e and r to the c the o e e f i t sts stat , pa tly fa t that ap stl tak s or granted the pers onal instru cti on he had already given to the Th essa s lonian on the same subj ect . C H A PT E R X

“ TH E FIRST EPISTLE o r PAUL TH E APOSTLE ” To TH E C ORI NTH IANS

Auth — P 1 . orshi p As already mentioned, the auline authorship o f this epistle is admitted with practical unanimity . The external evidence is abundant, from the end of the first century onward . In particular we find in the first epistle of Clement of Rome to the C hurch o f 5 D . C orinth ( 9 A . ) the following unmistakable reference o f P Take up the epistle the blessed aul the apostle . What was it that he first wrote to you in the beginning o f the gospel ? Of a truth it was under the influence of the Spirit that he wrote to you in his epistle concerning C himself and ephas and Apollos, because then as well as

1 or C . . now you had formed partialities (cf. i o f But the internal evidence would itself be decisive . For this epistle— and still more 2 C orinthians— bears very distinct traces o f the opposition which Paul had to en counter before his apostolic authority was ﬁrmly established and we know that such o pposition had been

o f vanquished long before his death . It is full minute — references to the state of the Corinthian C hurch being ’ to a large extent the apostle s reply to a letter of inquiry

C r VII from that hu ch ( . although it also deals with a of the C number evils and disorders in hurch which, it ’ appears, had come to the apostle s knowledge through 1 CORINTHIANS 7 3

1 1 1 . . other channels (i . ; v ; xi This last circum H er P u li P ve a na; . stance, as aley points out in his (iii o f is a token historical reality, as it is not likely that the

Corinthians would deliberately expose their own faults . Indeed their very acknowledgment and preservation of the it o n epistle, notwithstanding the aspersions which casts C their early character as a hurch , is a proof of its apostolic too claims to their regard . It is worthy of remark , , that ’ a to P it cont ins numerous references aul s movements, which would scarcely have been ventured o n by an impostor and a comparison o f the epistle with the Book o f Acts and other parts o f the New Testament brings o ut many striking coincidences, which can best be accounted f r n 1 o o the supposition of its genuineness . Along with Paul Sosthenes is associated in the opening verse (possibly the converted ruler of the synagogue, H ’ Acts xviii . e may have acte d as the apostle s amanuensis .

. f 2 The Readers . Unto the church o God which is C ’ at orinth (i . In the apostle s time Corinth was f practically the capital o Greece . It had attained pre at eminence a much earlier period , owing to its com m ercial advantages, but had been destroyed by the Roman conqueror about two hundred years before Paul ’s n in ' . ce t visit After lying in ruins for a y, it was rebuilt

C a 4 6 B . C . R by Julius esar , and peopled by a oman colony . This may account for the Roman names mentioned in 4 1 . the epistle (i . xvi We have an allusion to the effects produced by the ravages o f the conqueror o n d o f 1 2 the various kin s buildings (iii . , and also to the gladiatorial exhibitions (iv . Situated at the foot o f a great rock called Acre ce r in thu s about 2000 feet high on the Isthmus (famous for

1 C f n 4 2 . iii. 6 a d c . 2 . 1 . 1 0 1 1 c . 1 22 A ts xviii , xix xvi , , A ts xix , d Tim - 2 an 1 4 1 . 1 c nd Ro m . 3. 1 . . 1 2 . 5 . 8 a . iv i 7, xvi , A ts xviii xvi 74 THE N EW TESTAME NT AND ITS WRITERS

24 - 2 h . 7 P its games, ix ) whic connected the eloponnesus with the mainland , and lying in the direct route between E R C phesus and ome, orinth rapidly regained its former 1 c E prosperity, and be ame the chief emporium of urope, with a population of more than half a million , drawn

fo r ro ﬂi ac from many lands . It was so notorious its p g y encouraged by its very worship — that a “ Corinthian ” life was synonymous with luxury and licentiousness . At the same time its inhabitants made such pretensions to philosophical and literary culture that “ Corinthian words ” was a phrase meaning polished and cultivated speech . In this great and busy centre Paul spent a year and m a half o r more (Acts xviii . ) in his second issionary journey— being the longest time he had ever yet laboured He continuously in any city . found a home in the o f P house Aquila and riscilla, a Jewish couple who had recently come from Rome in consequence o f the decree I 9 o f C . h laudius (xvi ) , eminent for t eir generosity and m 4 5 Ro . . devotion ( xvi , ) and with them he wrought at

f - 2 3 4 o . . 3 35 his trade tent making (Acts xviii , xx , ; C o r 1 1 I . iv . ,

Beginning his ministry in the synagogue as usual , he was soon compelled by the opposition of the Jews to o f seek another place meeting, which he found in the

o f . house Justus, a converted proselyte There he

Go r Go d preached the spel , encouraged by a message f om

to no in a vision , and continued do so with small success notwithstanding an attempt o f the Jews to invoke the 4 His civil power against him (Acts xviii . converts appear to have been chieﬂy drawn from the lower classes 1 2 6 n o t ( . but they were free from the prevailing

1 It had two r our E ern an d e ern n med C enc reae and ha b s , ast W st , a h ’ um few e r er the o e ero cut the r Lechae . A y a s aft ap stl s visit N ﬁ st turf for a can al acro ss the I sthmus ; but the proj ect was no t carried

out .

76 TH E NE W TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS been ﬁtly sa id that it is a fragment which has no ” parallel in ecclesiastical history . It deals with a section o f early C hurch history which exhibits the most marked and varied features . It sets the apostle vividly before us as a teacher and governor, confronted with the dangers and perplexities, the errors and corruptions to which the C C orinthian hurch was liable, planted as it was in the D midst o f the rankest heathenism . In the words of ean S “ tanley, we are here allowed to witness the earliest conﬂict of C hristianity wit h the culture and the vices of the ancient classical world here we have an insight into ’ the principles which regulated the apostle s choice or rejec tion of the customs o f that vast fabric of heathen society ’ which was then emphatically called the world ; here we

trace the mode in which he combated the false pride, the

false knowledge, the false liberality, the false freedom , to the false display, the false philosophy, which an intel

i lectual age, espec ally in a declining nation, is constantly

liable .

The epistle is thus eminently practical , dealing with questions that had actually emerged in the experience

f r o the Chu ch to which it is addressed . In form it is

r r o ne o de ly and logical, taking up point after another in regular succession in style it is more simple and direct ’ o f P than most aul s compositions, rising at times into the

sublimest eloquence, as in the great eulogium on love in

the 1 3th chapter .

the As already mentioned , the epistle was in part reply to a letter of inquiry which had been sent to the apostle by the C orinthian C hurch in co nsequence of a letter which he had previously addressed to them

- l 1 9 1 1 . . 7 ( v . ; vii ; xvi , But the ﬁ rst six chapters have mainly reference to

r n C o f e ce tain dangers threateni g the hurch , which inf r the mation had reached apostle from another quarter, 1 CORINTHIANS 77

2 r C . causing him the utmost anxiety and grief ( o . ii — These dangers were mainly twofold the prevalence o f l t i . H par y spirit, and the tendency to immora ty ence the ro u p minence given , in the Opening sal tation , to the C holiness to which hristians are called , and to their C to o unity in hrist ; hence, , the fact that in the aecom panying thanksgiving for tokens o f grace in the C orin C of thian hurch , it is gifts knowledge and utterance rather than graces o f character that are specially men

tion ed. ( 1) The tendency to sectarian division mentioned in 1 2 i . seems to have been fostered by emissaries from ’ to P Jerusalem , who wished undermine aul s authority, and wrought upon the feelings and prejudices o f the

1 - 5 2 Jewish portion of the Church (ix . 3 The o f o f visit Apollos, a learned and eloquent Jew Alex ’ 2 P . 7 andria, after aul s departure (Acts xviii , had tended in the same direction , by leading to an invidious comparison between his philosophical and rhetorical style

of P al of preaching and the more simple method aul, though the latter continued to regard him as a valuable — coadjutor (xvi . But there were some probably the — J udaising party who were content neither with the

o f P o f teaching aul nor Apollos, but were disposed to range themselves under the name and authority o f

' C e n ephas, as t h the and a observer of the Law. Others professed to be independent o f um m h an teachers, and clai ed a more direct connection C with hrist, probably through their personal acquaint “ L ” ance with the brethren of the ord (ix . or their ﬁ national and historical af nity with C hrist . In Opposi

on tion to all these divisive courses, the apostle insists the o f C one L S H supremacy hrist as the ord and aviour. e introduces H is name more frequently in this epistle than in any other of his writings (nine times, for example, in 78 TH E NEW TESTAME NT AND ITS WRITERS

the ﬁrst nine verses) , and represents himself and other f apostles as being not the heads of dif erent schools,

C r w o but simply the ministers of h ist, by h m their con verts were brought to a knowledge of the truth as it is in Jesus . 2 a C ( ) With regard to the immor lity invading the hurch , — the apostle begins by referring to a terrible scandal the taking to wife by a C hristian of his stepmother during ’ 1 - 5 2 C r. . h . . o t e his father s lifetime (v , cf vii In exercise o f his apostolic autho rity he pronounces a stern f t e sentence on the of ender, and urges h necessity for an

r uncompromising opposition to all such sin , and sepa ation C from those guilty of it, if they be members of the hurch

(chap . In the next chapter, after deprecating the bringing o f legal actions by C hristians against o ne m another in the heathen courts, he rebukes the Antino ian

o a tendencies among them , and lays d wn the fundament l

n r principles o which the C h istian law of purity must rest . The apostle then proceeds to answer the inquiries of o n his converts the subject of marriage and celibacy, distinguishing between his o wn personal views and the

- x. expressed will of C hrist In viii . he deals with what was to his readers a subject of vast importance the duty o f C h ristians with reference to the feasts that

r we e held in the idol temples, and more particularly with f i regard to the use of the ﬂesh of animals of ered in sacrif ce, which was almost the only kind of animal food that could be bought in the market . This question he bids them o n co nsider not in the abstract, but as it bears the

of C r to f interests h istian society, and as it is likely af ect no t only their o wn character but the character and feel

- ings of their fellow C hristians . In this connection he — cites his o wn example of self denial even in things lawful .

- o his In xi . xiv . he lays d wn directions for the guidance of — t converts in matters of public worship , dealing wi h such 1 C ORINTHIANS 79 questions as the wearing of a covering o n the head in the the public services , the duty of a modest reticence on part f o f n o the female members the co gregation , the necessity ’ for sobriety and decorum in the celebration o f the Lord s S the o f upper, essential harmony and common end the various gifts conferred by the Spirit (o f which he enu

ra e o f me t s no less than nine), the superiority love to all of such gifts , the relative value and importance the several o f gifts, and the propriety making the religious services l h intelligib e to all , so t at they may be able to join in H m the loud Amen as the token of their fellowship . e su s up his teaching o n public worship in the two cardinal “ ” “ principles, let all things be done unto edifying, let ” 2 6 all things be done decently and in order (xiv . , The 1 5th chapter contains a dissertation of incomparable — value on the Resurrection o f the dead a doctrine which

o f C some the orinthians had begun to call in question ,

r - partly in a spi it of worldly mindedness, and partly as 1 f - the result o a sceptical philosophy . In verses 4 8 we have a summary o f evidences for the historical reality o f ’ o ur L - ﬁve o r ord s resurrection , stated within twenty thirty H is years after death , while most of the witnesses were 1 6 h still alive . In the t or closing chapter we ﬁnd a o f n number directions and intimations having refere ce ,

among other things, to the collection for the poor saints at Jerusalem (which the apostle hoped to ﬁnd ready o n C his next visit to orinth), after which the epistle concludes with the usual kind messages and autograph

greeting from the apostle .

1 It the u ure ener re urrec on e dou ed not the was f t g al s ti that th y bt , or c re urrec o n o f e u C r the er c e n so u hist i al s ti J s s h ist, latt fa t b i g f lly ’ ac cepted that one o fthe apo stle s chief arguments against the ir sceptic ism ’ was that it would in volve the rej ection of the testimony to Christ s n 1 3 res urrectio (xv . C H A PT E R XI

“ TH E SE C OND E PISTLE OF PAUL TH E APOSTLE ” TO TH E C o RINTH IAN s

horshi — P 1 . Aut p The auline authorship of this epistle is involved in that o f 1 C orinthians . There is in several points such a subtle harmony between them as can only be accounted for by their common authorship ; and the impression that both are genuine writings o f Paul is conﬁrmed by an examination o f relative passages in the f 1 Book o Acts . That the author did not derive his information from

1 The truth of this statemen t will be manifest to any one who will take the trouble to compare carefully the follo wing corresponding ’ le passages with the assistan ce of Pa v s H ome P a ulinae (iv . )

’ - 1 C o r. 5 2 C or. vii. 4 . re rd n P u to ce xvi . ; 7 ; ix ( ga i g a l s visit Ma

- o 2 4 d nia) .

- 1 8 vn . re rd n the c nd ou offence 1 C or. . 1 5 2 C or. 1 . . v 7 , ( ga i g s a al s ) 7 - 1 2 2 1 1 1 re rd n the mone rom ed bu 1 C or. . 1 2 Cor. i i . 0 t xvi , v i , ( ga i g y p is

- 2 not co ec ed . ix . 7 ll t ) — 3- re rd n the rou e xix. 2 . 1 2 or. 1 0 c e e Acts 3 xx C i . ( ga i g t bl whi h b f ll

Paul in Asia) .

- 1 5 1 6 . 23 1 1 9 I C or. re rd n c n e o f rou e 2 o r. . . C i , i ( ga i g his ha g t

- 5 . 1 1 8 c . re o u to r n 1 C or. an d xvi. 7 ; iv 7, ; A ts xix p vi s w iti g ,

2 1 22 hi s mo e for . , tiv it) ’ ’ - re rd n and T m o i 1 2 C or. . 1 9 . 9 Acts xvi i . 5 i xi ( ga i g Silas i thy s comin o him ro m cedon g t f Ma ia) .

2 or . 1 2 1 3 re rd n the door ened to him 6 C . Acts xx . , 7 ii , ( ga i g Op Tro a at s) .

- c 1 - 1 8 re rd n the im o f his mis r . 1 4 1 6 . 2 Co . x ; A ts xviii ( ga i g l its sionar y travels) . 2 CORINTHIANS 8 1 the Book Of Acts may be inferred from the circumstance m that the na e of Titus, which is prominent in the epistle,

is not once mentioned in Acts . The same conclusion may be drawn from a comparison o f their respective allusions to the attempts made upon Paul ’s life and 32 liberty at Damascus after his conversion (xi . Acts 23 ix . as well as from the fact that the enumeration 24 2 5 of of his trials in xi . , contains a number striking statements which have nothing corresponding to them in the Book of Acts, though at the same time there is nothing inconsistent with them . With regard to the apparent discrepancy as to the number Of his visits to 2 1 8 . C orinth (xiii . ) see page Apart from the minute correspondences above referred of to, there is a living interest and an air reality about the epistle, scarcely ever met with in forgeries, especially of that early period . With regard to extern al evidence a few echoes of expressions occurring in the epistle are to be found in the fragmentary writings that have come down to us of from the beginning the second century . By the end Of that century the quotations from the epistle in the

ae . writings of Iren us, Tertullian, etc , are explicit and unmistakable .

The amanuensis in this case was probably Timothy, as he is associated with the apostle in the opening verse .

2 . Th e Readers . Unto the church o f God which is C at orinth , with all the saints which are in the whole of ” S . ee 3 Achaia page 7 . — 3. Date and Place of Composition It was evidently written a few months after the ﬁrst epistle, say in the f 5 o 7 A. D . summer , from some town in Macedonia, probably 1 Thessalonica .

1 “ From P ccord n to n o e n f e d o e e in A. V hilippi a i g t at pistl . But this is not so probable in view Of the fact that the apo stle s eems 6 8 2 TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

E In the interval the apostle had left phesus (i . after his narrow escape from the violence of the crowd , w and had proceeded to Troas, here he anxiously expected C the arrival Of Titus . The latter had been sent to orinth, h either with the ﬁrst epistle or shortly after its dispatc , ’ to en force the apostle s views and to bring him back word of the effect produced by his epistle at this momentous r f C c isis in the history o his most inﬂuential hurch (viii .

1 8 1 r. . 6 ; xii . ; C o xvi

had In his disappointment at not ﬁnding Titus, he no heart to embrace the Opportunity of preaching at Troas, 1 2 o d to . and had pr cee ed Macedonia (ii , where 5 Titus at length joined him (vii . , It was after ’ getting Titus report, bringing him great relief of mind in the midst of his severe trials and heavy responsibilities

4 - 1 6 . (vii . ; xi that he appears to have written this of epistle, which he sent by the hands Titus, aecom

an ied o p by two other brethren , wh m he describes as ” o f C r the messengers Of the churches, the glory h ist, “ o n e of them being the brother whose praise in the ” gospel is spread through all the churches, and the other

o ur r r b other, whom we have many times p oved earnest ” 6 1 6 in many things (viii . , A difﬁculty has been raised about the expression in “ ” . 1 xiii , This is the third time I am coming to you .

So C o me think the apostle had paid a second visit to rinth ,

ro E o to o f f m phesus, pri r the writing his first epistle . But another explanation is to be found in the importance attaching to the visit he had intended to pay on his way to Macedonia (i . The confidence Of the Corinthians in him had been shaken by the disappointment he had to e re d ed the C urc e of cedon 1 for in hav al a y visit h h s Ma ia (viii . the co ur e o f doin s o P ou d n ur come r to one s g hilippi w l at ally fi st, u rd travellin g s o thwa . 1 n em e een m de to den e e two re ren Ma y att pts hav b a i tify th s b th . o b on e o f em Luke is generally held t e th .

84 TH E NEW TESTAM ENT AND ITS WRITERS

f C r 1 1 o 1 . 7 name, and even that hrist, for pa ty purposes (

- 2 - 5 - 1 1 8 . 3 1 2 1 5 2 1 2 1 2 . 2 . . 7 iii , ; v ; x , ; xi , , , To defeat the efforts of these J udaising teachers and to refute the charges and insinuations which they were

r b inging against him was the main Object of this epistle , By do ing so the apostle hoped to obviate the necessity C fo r any sharp dealing after he arrived at orinth (xii .

20 2 1 . , xiii

- to f i . P of In . vii aul seeks conciliate the af ection his converts by giving them an account of his sufferings and o n H Of the anxiety he had felt their behalf. e explains that his delay in visiting them had not been owing to

ﬁ kleness of on t any c purpose his par , but to a desire for the restoration Of peace and purity before he cam e H e among them . gives a frank exposition of his views

and feelings, his trials and supports, as a minister of m o f C hrist, aking glad and thankful acknowledgment v the kind reception they had gi en to his deputy, and of the full amends they had made in the important case of had C hurch discipline about which he written to them .

- to In viii ix . he exhorts them a prompt and liberal fulﬁlment of their promise to contribute for the relief Of

erusalem — a the needy brethren at J , promise of which he had boasted to the churches at Macedonia in order to

stimulate their generosity . In this connection he sets forth more fully than anywhere else in his writings the motives and dispositions which should actuate Christians

in the discharge Of this duty Of pecuniary liberality . At this point there is a sudden change in the apostle ’s

f - tone and the remainder o the epistle (x. xiii . ) is devoted o f H to a vindication his character as an apostle . e enumerates his many claims to the respect and Obedience

t n of his converts, and closes with an impressive salu atio , fo llowed by the form Of Benediction which has now “ become so general in the C hurch : The grace of the 2 CORINTHIANS 85

L C o f God ord Jesus hrist, and the love , and the co m H ” G . munion of the oly host, be with you all u That the epistle s cceeded in regaining, or rather in

Of retaining, for the apostle the general conﬁdence his C orinthian converts, may be inferred from the veneration in which his memory was held amongst them a few years Of after his death . this veneration we ﬁnd unmistakable

Of C to C s tokens in the epistle lement the orinthian , written towards the close Of the ﬁrst century . C H A P T E R XII

“ TH E E PISTLE OF PAUL To TH E GALATIAN S

A r hi — 1 . utho s p This is another epistle whose genuine — ness is scarcely disputed . Its main topic the relation — o f C hristians to the ceremonial law of the Jews would lead us to ﬁx its composition at a period anterior to the

o f ractii destruction Jerusalem , when the question was p a c lly set at rest . I ts character a nd style are in con sis tent with the idea of

or e 1 f g ry. ( ) The picture which it gives of the state o f G C to o o f the alatian hurch is lifelike, and the play feeling it exhibits o n the part of the apostle is too subtle for the inventive power Of an age so little skilled in that f 2 o . o f kind ﬁction ( ) Its representation facts, as regards the P too relations Of aul with the other apostles , is candid to have been got up in the interests of C hurch h to o unity, and on the other and is moderate in its tone to have been framed in the interests of any known party 3 in the C hurch . ( ) A comparison of the personal and histo rical allusions in the epistle with statements in the Book o f Acts and some o f the other epistles ascribed to P aul , shows a substantial harmony, along with an occa — s ion al diversity that betokens independence the epistle ’ furnishing details of many incidents in Pau l s life that are only mentioned in a general way by the author of

TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

them and the Greek immigrants who were there before

G —Graecia So them the country was called allo . deep and

lasting was their inﬂuence, that even in the end of the

D . fourth century A . Jerome was able to trace a strong resemblance between the language Of Galatia and that spoken on the banks o f the Moselle and the Rhine and modern travellers ha ve been struck with the fair hair and blue eyes that mark an aﬂin ity between the pastoral o f G tribes alatia and the peasantry of Western France . C onﬁrmation o f the view that it was to the inhabit ants of C eltic Galatia the epistle was addressed has

u en thusia sm chlen ess been fo nd in the , as well as the ﬁ

lo ve o novelt o f and f y, which have been characteristic the G E auls both in urope and Asia, and which left their o n h 6 mark the early history of t e Galatian Church (i .

1 - 3 - . 1 3 1 6 iii iv . ; v . Traces have also been dis

su erstition drunkenness cerned in the epistle Of the p , , a va rice va n it irascibilit s tr e , y, y and if that sometimes 5 2 C . 1 1 2 6 impair the charm Of the eltic character (v , , ; 3 4 vi . , , ’ According to this theory Paul s preaching Of the Gospel in Galatia was due to his detention in that co untry o n his way to the more promising ﬁeld Of pro of consular Asia, caused by an attack the painful and — humiliating malady to which he was liable supposed to

1 3- 1 6 have been an aggravated form of ophthalmia (iv . ,

2 r. G C o . . 7 cf xii This visit to alatia, which took place in the course of his second missionary journey, 5 1 A D . . to about , is alluded in the Book of Acts in the most general te rms (xvi . but from some passages in this epistle, already quoted, it would appear that his f C faithful and energetic preaching o hrist cruciﬁed (iii . l 2 ff , ) had excited great enthusiasm and a ection . A a1a ia to . G t al 1 3 second visit (implied in G . iv . ) is 2 2 23 ’ recorded in Acts xviii . , , during the apostle s third GALATIANS 8 9

“

5 4 D . n A. missionary jour ey, about , when he went G P through the region Of alatia and hrygia in order, ” stablishing all the disciples . From this language it appears that no t a few congregations had been formed in the district ; but it would seem that their feelings towards the apostle and his Gospel had in the meantime

undergone a change, and that he had , on this second

to . 9 occasion, speak to them in tones Of warning (i ; 2 1 1 6 v . ; iv . While the majority Of scholars have hitherto been agreed in giving to Galatia the narrower interpretation

that is assumed in the foregoing statement, a number of 1 critics hold that the name is to be taken in its wider a R me ning as a designation for the oman province, which included several other districts besides that Of the C C Asiatic elts, and that the hurches to which the epistle of was addressed were no other than those Antioch , L D Iconium, ystra, and erbe, which were planted by P u aul in his ﬁrst missionary jo rney, and Of which we i have an account in Acts xii , xiv . , as well as in the meagre notices above referred to, in chaps . xvi . and xviii . The following are the chief arguments adduced in support of this view

. 1 L I ( ) The cities referred to (Antioch , Iconium, ystra, and Derbe) formed part of the Roman province o f G f alatia in the time o the apostle . They were important centres Of Roman civilisation ; and the Roman name “ Galatians was certainly one to which their citizens

1 Ren n Perro er H u r e c er Pﬂeiderer etc a , t, Sabati , a s ath , W izsa k , , . Recently a carefu l and elaborate argument in favo ur of this view has een d nced Pro e or R m ur h in he . The h t b a va by f ss W M . a say ( C c R oma n E m ire c i who r n to h d cu n o f he . . t e o t p , haps b i gs is ssi question a rare knowledge of the archaeolo gy and top ography of As ia

nor. ccord n to Pro e or R m the re n m conce o n Mi A i g f ss a say, p vaili g is pti “ as to the meani ng Of Galatia has been due to the fact that during the secon d century the term Galatia ceas ed to bear the sens e which it ” had to Rom n in the r cen ur a a ﬁ st t y . 90 THE NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS were entitled — indeed it was the only acceptable title by which they could be addressed in common . It was a o f mode address congenial to the mind of the apostle, who followed the Roman lines of communication in his i r R m ssion wo k , and regarded the oman empire as the appointed ﬁeld Of his labours ; and it is in accordance with his use o f similar geographical terms in a Roman ” “ ” “ “ SO G i sense Macedonia, Achaia, Asia alat a 1 P 2 in et . i . I . ( ) The enthusiastic reception accorded to G him by the alatians, to which the apostle refers in

. 1 4 the epistle (iv , corresponds with the account given in the Book o f Acts of the wonderful impression m L ade at Antioch and elsewhere, but especially at ystra where the cry was raised “ the gods are come down to us f ” 3 in the likeness o men . ( ) The ritualistic tendencies supposed to have been due to C eltic influence find their true explanation in the Oriental character o f the Phrygians “ L cao n ians and y , which gave them a strong natural ” 4 affinity fo r the Hebraic type Of Christianity . ( ) The 1 language Of vi . 7 From henceforth let no man trouble ” me for I bear branded on my body the marks of Jesus, “ f finds its explanation in the persecutions, suf erings L what things befell me at Antioch , at Iconium , at ystra 2 5 o n ( Tim . iii . ( ) The charge Of inconsistency the “ 1 1 : part of the apostle implied in v . But I, brethren , u if I still preach circ mcision, why am I still persecuted

ed if occasion , as it probably was, by his conduct in L causing Timothy to be circumcised at ystra, would be v ery likely to be brought against him by the Jews in 6 that and the neighbouring cities . ( ) The repeated n 1 9 I 3 allusions to Bar abas (ii . , , , insomuch that even Barnabas was carried away with their dissimu lation give the impression that Barnabas was personally

to known the readers , and seem more natural if addressed C S G to the hurches in outh alatia, where Barnabas had

92 THE NEW TESTAM ENT AND ITS WRITERS likely that he should have set himself to the evangelisa tion of such a remote district — with its scattered cities and fatiguing journeys— when he was recovering from 1 S sickness, and when the leading of the pirit, so far as E h to . e recorded , was conducting him urope But, if had we u done so, sho ld surely have found some information o f C in the Book of Acts regarding his planting hurches, considering the fulness with which his missionary work in other parts of Asia Minor during the same period is

n o f narrated , in accordance with the systematic pla the 3 “ author . ( ) The honourable position assigned to the ” I Churches Of Galatia ( 1 C or. xvi . ) in connection with the charitable fund which the apostle was raising throughout the C hurch for the benefit o f the poor — “ ” C hristians at J erusalem side by side with Macedonia “ — . 1 2 2 C o r . and Achaia (cf. ix , ) shows that they C t were hurches Of considerable importance, whose exis to of ence was not likely be ignored in the Book Acts, espe cially after they had been the recipients (as the author could scarcely fail to know) Of such a memorable to epistle . In this connection it is significant find “ ” Gain s of D erbe as well as Timothy Of Lystra (Acts 4 P o xx . ) among the deputies who accompanied aul fr m Gr o n eece into Asia, the way to Jerusalem to present e f of G C we the unit d Of erings the entile hurch , whereas look in vain fo r any representatives Of North Galatia . In the light o f all these considerations it will be seen

1 ’ Pro fessor Ramsay h olds that the true explanatio n of the ap ostle s ” m f h al 1 h in rs m on r n r o t e e G . 3 i fi ity fl sh ( iv. ) is t at his fi t issi a y ourne P u was ro r ed m r ou e er Per ere j y a l p st at with a ala i s f v at ga , wh he not m ro rr ed dur n the hot e on o in u ne. i p bably a iv i g s as , p ssibly J Such an ill ness is a co mmo n experience o f travellers at the present day ; and a remedy is frequently s o ught in su ch a change to the m o n oc c hills as that which Paul obtained when he c a e t A ti h ( A ts xiii . 1 3 H er o his ce had een urn ed e rd Per e n , ith t fa b t w stwa ( ga b i g o n the to Ro me an d o n to the c n e of n n o ed way ) , it was wi g ha g pla i v lv in the o urn e to n o c o n r who had come P u j y A ti h that J h Ma k , with a l and B rn far as Per returned to eru em . a abas as ga, J sal GALATIANS 93 that the balance o f probability is in favour o f the South — Galatian theory the very existence o f Churches in G o f A P North alatia, in the time the postle aul , being a matter of conjecture . The only other intercourse between Paul and the Galatian C hurches (besides the visits already mentioned) Of which we have any record in the New Testament is the injunctio n above referred to concerning the collection for the po or Of the C hurch at Jerusalem . This com ’ m u n ication may have taken place during the apostle s last C or visit to these hurches, in the course of his subsequent E m a stay at phesus, when the news y have reached him ’ of his convert s lapse from the truth . Their falling away had evidently been connected with an attempt o n the part of Judaising teachers to persuade

law of 1 - 3 to an observance Of the ceremonial Moses (iii .

- 4 2 1 . 2 1 2 I 2 i 1 0 1 1 7 . v. h , , ; v , , ; vi , Althoug the Galatian C hristians were mainly converts from 2 8 . . heathenism (iv . v vi some of them had doubtless been connected with the Jewish synagogues , r either as members o as proselytes . Josephus tells us that two thousand Jewish families had been settled in L P G ydia and hrygia by Antiochus the reat . Numerous Jews had also been attracted to the cities o f Galatia proper by the commercial advantages which these afforded and o f their privileges, Josephus tells us, a monumental record

ra existed in the temple Of Augustus at Ancy , the ancient capital of the district . The existence of this Jewish element in the Church explains the frequent allusions to the Old Testament and the inﬂuence gained over the G udaisin C alatians by the J g hristians Of Jerusalem, who

1 ccord n to the or G n eor e e e c er ere A i g N th alatia th y , th s t a h s w n d n e o f the r u c enden c e c C ae r e us taki g a va tag it alisti t i s whi h , as sa t lls , ere c r c er c the G u and c had een o ered the w ha a t isti Of a ls , whi h b f st by “ or o f the P r i n C e e d ceremo n and w ship h yg a yb l , with its wil ial e u mu o n hid o s tilati s . 94 TH E NEW TESTAM ENT AND ITS WRITERS

z G were ealous Of the law, and desired to make the ospel tributary to the synagogue and the temple (1. They had taken advantage of Paul ’s absence to undermine his character as an apostle, and had endeavoured only too successfully to cause a reaction , in the minds of the

G r of alatians, from the simplicity and spi ituality the G was ospel . It an attempt to recover the ground which 4 5 1 1 1 4 they had lost at Antioch and elsewhere (ii . , , , ; 1 2 3 Acts xv . , t and Pla e f m s t n — 3. Da e c o Co p o i io From what has been already said as to the allusions in this epistle to the ’ G apostle s second visit to alatia, we may infer that its w 5 4 A D as . . G composition subsequent to , if we take alatia 5 the o r 1 A . D . in narrower sense, to , if we understand to R it mean the oman province Of that name, which included the cities o f Asia Minor visited by Paul in his “ ” o n o r ﬁrst missionary j ur ey . The expression so soon , “ ” rather so quickly has been thought to imply that the epistle must have been written very shortly after the second visit . But if there is any reference here to a

ca llin o r previous event, it was probably their g, conversion , that the apostle had in view ; and the language would be equally apprOpriate whether an interval of ﬁve or

O f ten years had elapsed . The expression may be better

r taken , howeve , as referring simply to the rapidity with which they succumbed to the inﬂuence of false teachers . ’ An o ther note Of time has been found in the apostle s 1 8 to to . . allusions his two visits Jerusalem (i , ii Professor Ramsay 1 holds that the visits referred to could ’ have had no bearing on the question o f Paul s independent authority as an apostle to the Galatians unless they had taken place before his ﬁrst appearance among them as

1 u c in man E n ire rd ed on 1 The Ch r h the Ro . 0 f p , thi iti , p 7 . O . n ruc e r c e in The E x ositor for u u 1 89 his i st tiv a ti l p A g st 5 .

96 THE NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS ability a considerable interval must have elapsed between the meeting of the Council at Jerusalem (whose peaceable decrees were taken to Antioch by the hands of Barsabbas S P and ilas, accompanying aul and Barnabas) and the

r P ar ival at Antioch of eter, and, subsequently, of certain men who “ came from James ” and induced Peter to m of G C withdraw fro the fellowship the entile hristians .

w to This incident, hich seems have provoked the violent o f udais ers resentment the J , probably occurred during ’

5 4 . P l to A . D au s visit Antioch about , mentioned in a later 2 2 chapter (Acts xviii . , and if so, the epistle may ’ have been written in the course o f the apostle s third on missionary journey, which he entered soon afterwards . The general opinion has been that it was thus sent from ’ E in phesus during the apostle s long residence that city . But there seems to be good reason to assign it to a still e 2 C R n lat r date, somewhere between orinthians and oma s , w as we are no w doing . For hen we compare it with the epistles just mentioned , we ﬁnd a strong resemblance to — ’ both o f these to the former in the writer s tone Of feel ing regarding his apostleship and the attacks made upon to him ; the latter, in language, reasoning, and general 1 cast of doctrine . It was manifestly written previous to “ R to omans, being it as the rough model to the ﬁnished

ec on o n m et in r o e who e Pro e or Ram Obj ti is ly pa t by th s , lik f ss say, wo ou d n the e e to 5 5 A. D . e r or t e ore 1 Cor n w l assig pistl , a y a b f i thians r en c eem to be the e r e o f the er e — C orin n was w itt , whi h s s a li st s i s thia s ’ G ns Ro m n —dealin re ro em in the o e ( alatia ), a s g with this g at p bl ap stl s r minist y .

1 - See L oo on Ga latians . 4 5 4 9 . Pro e or acobus in the ightf t , pp f ss J , P res b teria n and Re ormed R eview n uar 1 895 o n out in y f , Ja y , p i ts that l 6 we e er ne r ro ac to the us e the com o e Ga . ii. hav a v y a app h Of p sit “ Greek word translate d respect of persons which Paul employs for m — mu c ne rer ro c t n w 11 . I a e fin the firs t time in Ro . I h a app a h ha d in or n i n ou in the er e s e ere e 2 C i th a s, alth gh latt pi tl th is a passag ( x . 7) where it might have be en fitly used if it had already formed part ’ o f the apostle s vocabulary even in the unconsolidated form in which in al 6 it appears G . ii . . GALATIANS 97 statue and it appears also to have been written when the tension Of the apostle ’s feelings was less severe than

2 C . when he wrote orinthians With great probability, therefore, we may place its composition in the period of the transition between these two epistles , towards close ma D . Of the year 5 7 A . It y have been written in the ’ G apostle s journey from Macedonia to reece (Acts xx . for the expression “ all the brethren which are with me ”

(i . in the Opening salutation , would be more likely to be used by the apostle while he was the centre of a tra velling party, than if he had been residing at the seat o f a congregation . Cha a t r and Cont en s — 4 . r c e t From ﬁrst to last the epistle is marked by a conspicuous unity of purpose its main Object being to counteract the J udaising process that had been going on for some time in the Galatian

C hurch . An important factor in that process had been the denial of Paul ’s apostolic authority on the ground L that he had never seen the ord, and that he owed his knowledge of the Gospel to the apostles who had their n headquarters at Jerusalem . O the question of circum cision and the Observance of the law it was alleged that he was particularly to be distrusted, as a renegade from of the religion his fathers . of Without a word his usual praise and thanksgiving, the apostle begins with a bold assertion Of his apostolic L ofﬁce as directly conferred upon him by the ord . This is followed by an account o f his intercourse and relations

n with the other apostles after his conversio , showing that he owed his conception of the Gospel not to them , but to inﬂuence exerted on him from above ( e.g . in the

. His solitudes OfArabia, i ministry had been acknow ledged by the reputed pillars of the C hurch (James and Cephas and John) as having the same Divine sanction

G r n for for the entiles , as their p eachi g had the Jews . 98 TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

Since that time he had consistently maintained the free Of Law dom Of his converts from the bondage the , having even gone so far on o ne occasion as to rebuke Peter fo r his dissimulation , when he would have withdrawn from fellowship with the Gentile Christians at Antioch 1 8 (i . H aving thus disposed Of the personal aspect of the to question , he passes its more doctrinal aspect by appealing to the spiritual blessing which the Galatians had experienced under his ministry when he preached G to o f the ospel them without any mixture Jewish ritual . He proves that the Law has been superseded by the G of ospel, the latter being the full assertion that principle ’ o f faith that had always lain at the foundation of men s God o f H e acceptance with , even in the time Abraham . shows that the Law given by Moses could only create a sense o f sin without providing a remedy . It was b ut ’ a temporary means o f training God s people for the enjoyment o f their privileges as His children - standing to G in the same relation the ospel , as the children of Hagar the bondwoman did to Isaac the child of promise

- v . . (iii . In vi the apostle warns them against the o f abuse their spiritual freedom, setting before them the of C true principles hristian morality, and exhorting them o f had to to several duties which they need be reminded . H e concludes with a postscript in his own handwriting

v 1 1 u ( i. in which he sums p the argument with an emphasis and decision that contrast strongly with the o f hesitation apparent in some the earlier passages, where he is trying to vindicate his conduct without casting H any unnecessary reﬂections on the other apostles . e exposes the unworthy motives of his Opponents, reafﬁrms 1 the supreme importance of the C ross o f C hrist and of regeneration in Him as essential to the true Israel of

1 n me i occur ort - ree me in or e e The a Of Chr st s f y th ti s this sh t pistl .

C H A PT E R XIII

“ TH E E PISTLE o r PAUL THE APOSTLE To TH E ROMANS

A r — P 1 . utho ship The auline authorship of this epistle is universally admitted . There is no lack o f external evidence in its favour ; but its strong resemblance to Galatians is enough to prove its common authorship with

. n that epistle Moreover, a comparison Of its conte ts with other Pauline epistles and with the Book of Acts affords valuable conﬁrmation of its genuineness and 1 authenticity . n 2 2 From o e of the closing salutations (xvi . ) we learn

1 Besides the remarkable co incidences with regard to the time and

ace co m o on . 1 02 the o o n o n s are or of pl Of its p siti , p , f ll wi g p i t w thy ’ no 1 The s a emen of the r er on - e de re to tice . ( ) t t t w it s l g f lt si visit Ro me and of his o e o f now doin so er u l n his mi on to , h p g aft f lﬁl i g ssi eru em in rmon the ur o e e re ed the o e J sal , is ha y with p p s xp ss by ap stl

- E es us o me me e ore . 1 3 . 2 2 25 c . 2 1 . 2 The at ph s ti b f , i xv A ts xix ( ) request which he makes to the Chris tians at Ro m e that they wou ld un ite with him in prayer that he may be delivered fro m them that ” ’ are di o ed en in uda c corre on d the o e e re on s b i t J i , sp s with ap stl s xp ssi m 0 c o f ee in in as ourn e to eru e . 3 31 . 22 f l g his l t j y J sal (xv , A ts xx , (3) The teac hing in this epis tle and in Galatians is in striking ’ rmon P u m ion the o e the Gen e and o e ha y with a l s iss as ap stl Of til s, g s far to explain the accusation brought again st him on hi s last recorded 4 The n ure of the i o vi sit to Jerus alem (Acts xxi . ( ) at v sit t “ Rome con em ed the r er of e i e n me I ma t plat by w it this p stl , a ly, that y un ou in o rou the ll of God an d o e er o u come to y j y th gh wi , t g th with y so er d f eren rom the o e c u ﬁnd rest (xv . is v y i f t f what ap stl a t ally e er enced en he c rr ed ri oner to Ro me cou d not xp i , wh was a i a p s , that it l have been so des cribed by any one who derived his information from c the Book Of A ts . ROMANS 101 that the epistle was written by Tertius as the apostle ’s amanuensis . — “ R 2 . The R a rs e de TO all that are in ome, beloved ” of God . ab , called to be saints These words and the sence o f any mention of bishops and deacons either in this epistle or in the account of the welcome which Paul received from the Roman brethren three years after w 1 5 ards (Acts xxviii . ) would seem to indicate that there C was no formally organised hurch in the city, but merely groups of believers meeting for worship in private houses f (xvi . They seem to have been mainly o Gentile

5 1 3- 1 5 3- 5 6 . 1 2 4 1 origin (i . , , ; xi ; xv . , But the o f whole tenor the epistle, abounding as it does in quota tions from the Old Testament (more than sixty in num

Law ber) and in allusions to the Jewish , clearly shows that they had been led to a knowledge of the truth through their connection with the Jewish faith as prose d of lytes of the gate (indee , some them appear to have — — 1 . been born Jews ii . 7 ; xvi 7 and hence the expres “ ” . I sion , I speak to men that know the law, vii ) . The Jews had for a long time been a numero us and powerful o f the R section community at ome, and their religion 1 had gained great inﬂuence among the educated classes . The introduction of Christianity among them had appar ently been due not to apostolic labours (certainly not to 2 of P - ﬁ those eter, whose alleged episcopate of twenty ve

1 Thousands Of Jewish captives were brought to Rome by Pompey rom the E ou B m 63 . 0 and ro me or h f ast, ab t . f that ti f ward t e Jews con inued to ro in nu m ers an d in u en ce un i the n t g w b fl t l, in ext cen ur enec cou d of em Victoribus e e e dederunt t y, S a l say th , vi ti l g s , “ ” The con uered e en to eir con u er q hav giv laws th q ors . 2 “ It is not ou n c n ce mon the re coe of he with t sig ifi a that, a g f s s t C com the on ure of an o e c n ata bs, ly fig ap stl whi h is represe ted separately ro m the re o f the e e o f . P ul de cr ed P L f st tw lv is that St a , s ib as AU US ' P T R APO L A O STO US de b side ure the Goo d e erd. S , si y with a fig Of Sh ph In none of the C co m Pe er ec de n me ata bs is St . t sp ially signated by a — ’ or r u e . rr o Tes timon o he a ta bs att ib t Ma i tt s y f t C com . 1 02 TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS years at Rome is unsupported by evidence in the New f Testament or elsewhere) , but to the influence o C hris “ so tian travellers, especially, we may believe, of the ou rn ers R j from ome, both Jews and proselytes, who had witnessed the wonderful works of God o n the great day f P o Pentecost (Acts ii . Although aul had never R C been at ome, many of the hristians there were person — ally known to him possibly owing to their temporary R E C — banishment from ome by the dict Of laudius, as we may infer from the numerous greetings in the closing 1 4 8 . 1. 7 chapter . From , xv , it would appear that the religious condition of the C hristians at Rome was in many respects satisfactory and in keeping with this we learn from Tacitus that a great multitude of them endured r marty dom in the reign of Nero a few years later . But ’ the apostle s language (in chap . xiv . ) would indicate the o f a m existence we kness and disagreement among the , in connection with certain scruples felt by some of their number with regard to the eating of animal food and the observance Of days and seasons . They were also liable to many serious temptations, as we may infer from the

- exhortations in xii xiii . and their spiritual life required to be strengthened (i . ’ t d Pla e of C m s t n — 3. Da e an c o p o i io From the writer s

2 2 - 2 6 um n s . c1rc sta ce . , as stated in xv , viewed in the

- - - 1 1 1 C or. . 1 4 2 1 3 . 7 9 r l . C o . ight Of Acts xx , xxiv xvi ;

- 4 1 2 1 . viii . , ix , , we gather that the epistle was written ’ towards the close o f Paul s second visit to C orinth (early in 5 8 o n the eve Of his journ ey to Jerusalem to e carry up the alms collect d for the poor brethren there, — after which he was to make his long intended visit to 1 Rome . 1 I n remarkable harmon y with this in ference as to the da te of the e pistle are the fac ts ( 1 ) that o f those who accompanied Paul as far ” u rne o rd ru m c . 4 on his o e e ree as Asia (A ts xx ) last j y t wa s J sal , th , n m e o er Gains and Timo en d e r u on in a ly, S sipat , , thy, s th i sal tati s this

1 04 THE NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

systematic form , and at the same time with such modera tion and caution as was fitted to disarm the prejudices and conciliate the favour of the Jewish element in the C hurch . That element had not yet been infected with the leaven of malignant bigotry, emanating from Jeru a s lem, which had made its influence felt in so many of the other Churches where Paul had laboured and the epistle was intended to serve the purpose of prevention rather than cure . It was also intended to pave the way ’ fo r to C R the apostle s visit the hurch at ome, whose a destined greatness he fores w, and by whose assistance he hoped to Obtain a still wider field for his missionary 1 labours . to C R Being addressed the hristians Of imperial ome, o this epistle is distinguished by its c smopolitan tone, w 4 5 . to which is sho n at the outset (i , ) by a reference “ ” the obedience Of fai th to which all the nations are “ C o ur L o called in Jesus hrist ord . It sets f rth the universality of the Gospel as the power of God unto sal to o n e to J e w vation every that believeth the first, and ” 2 also to the Greek (i . and brings out the contrast n ot C G between Moses and hrist, as in alatians, but between Adam and Christ as the representatives of

o f . nature and grace (v With no less propriety, in writing to the inhabitants o f a city that was the seat o f justice for the whole civilised world , the apostle looks at the great question o f salvation from a judicial or

o f - forensic point view, exhibiting the bearing of the

1 In m e of war o od ener no e the m ort nce of ti , a g g al k ws w ll i p a se zin comm n d n o on an d d cern em or of n u on . i g a i g p siti s, is s th by a s t i t iti P ul had i cu e der of e rm c St. a th s fa lty, as a l a that littl a y whi h , with r u e on r re en or to u due the n on to its spi it al w ap s Of wa fa , w t f th s b ati s r and e ourn e n in the eas he e i e d in Ch ist : , whil j yi g t, k pt th s st a ily ’ ’ e I mu o see Rome Fr er S no tical Lectures T rd vi w : st als ( as s y p , hi

er e . S i s, p 2 “ The word all or every occurs nearly seventy times in the e epistl . ROMANS 105

G o n ospel the interests of law and righteousness, proving o f G the guilt all men , both Jews and entiles, at the bar D of ivine judgment, and proclaiming the doctrine o f justiﬁcation by faith as the only means o f acceptance with Go d. H of aving set forth the great scheme redemption , the apostle deals with its bearing o n the fortunes o f the H e h chosen people ( ix . shows t at their failure to C enter into the blessings Of the New ovenant, which gave him “ great sorrow and unceasing pain in (his) o wn heart, was due to their spiritual blindness, as fore f i told in the writings o the prophets . Their recent exper ’ ence was in keeping with the analogy of God s dealings with them in the past, but their rejection was only partial and temporary, destined to lead in the mysterious wisdom of Divine providence to a still fuller manifestation “ Of Divine goodness For God hath shut up all unto dis ”

v . obedience, that he might ha e mercy upon all (xi o n of After this lesson the philosophy history, in which the apostle seeks to justify the ways Of God to men and is moved again and again to adoration of the Divine m his wisdo , he exhorts readers to the cultivation of various graces and virtues as the best refutation o f the charge of lawlessness to which the gospel Of the free

of God . grace is liable (xii In conclusion, he sends numerous greetings to individual Christians with whom of he is personally acquainted, many whom had rendered C valuable service to the hurch , and with whom he had probably been brought into contact at Ephesus and other great centres . There are several breaks in the epistle where it might

ﬁtl . have y terminated This circumstance, together with variations in the arrangement o f the last two chapters in

f MS . M some o the S (and the blanks left in a S. of some importance where the words “ in Rome ” occur in the 1 06 THE NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITE RS

vv. 7 opening chapter, and has given rise to the idea that the epistle was sent as an encyclical or circular

e ofC . lett r, with varying terminations, to a number hurches o f We may add that the fact this epistle, although to R G not addressed omans, being written in reek, is only ’ in keeping with the apostle s literary habit, but is also in accordance with the general use of Greek at the time C throughout the civilised world . The hristian congrega of G tions the first century were like so many reek colonies, as far as language was concerned and it was not till the latter part Of the second century that a Latin version L fo r of and a atin literature arose, chiefly the benefit the 1 C hristians in North Africa . It may be noted that most o f those to whom the apostle sends salutations in this G epistle bear reek names .

1 E en er the - e ill - r ten n cri ons the c co m v lat , ill sp lt, w it i s pti Of ata bs , w h e r r n e in erm n in of Gree and L n c r c er ow it th i st a g t i gl g k ati ha a t s , sh he C urc in Ro me was not et ul n o n d L o o that t h h ( ) y f ly ati alise ( ightf t).

1 08 THE NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

E — he in mperors remained for two years military custody, his right hand chained to the left hand of the soldier who

r H e o . t gua ded him was permitted, however, reside in his own hired lodging, and to hold free converse with friends and visitors. It was during this period that the epistles to the Phili ia ns C olossians Philemon E hesians pp , the , , and the p E of Of were composed . ach these epistles bears tokens having been written during the author’s imprisonment 1 3 1 4 1 l 3 9 1. C o . . 1 8 P v . P . 7 7 v ( hil , , , iv , hilemon , 1 f E h. . 1 6 1 0 1 3 . o . . 1 , ; p iii , iv ; Acts xxviii , It is further evident that this imprisonment was occasioned a by his pre ching of the Gospel to the Gentiles (C ol. i .

- E h 2 4 2 . . I 9 20 2 1 2 2 1 7 . . 9 ; p vi , ; Acts xxii , , xxvi Some think that the imprisonment in question was that which the apostle endured at C aesarea . But in several respects the circumstances referred to in the epistles

m hi R a im har onise better with s stay in ome . ( ) The pression made by his bonds which “ became manifest in C a to hrist throughout the whole pr etorian guard, and all ” l “ ’ . a the rest ( Phi i . and the mention Of C esar s household ( iv . point to the imperial city as the 1 ’ in ﬂu n e 6 o f scene Of his e c . ( ) The apostle s purpose hi visiting Macedonia after s release (ii . would not answer to hi s sta te o f mind while he was looking forward to a visit to Rome . ( c) The expression used in Acts xxviii . ’ “ ” 20 to P describe aul s conﬁnement, namely, this chain, h 20 f E . is almost identical with the language o p . vi (margin) o n the same subject ; while the same cannot be said Of the apostle ’s allusion to his condition at “ C ae w God sarea when he replied to Agrippa, I ould to ,

1 “ The camp and the court were always centres Of Christian ising ’ omm en r ou e o d ormed an mmens e e inﬂ uence (M s ) . Caesa s h s h l f i stab lishment inc udin ous nd of e and reedmen em o ed in , l g th a s slav s f pl y all kin ds of Ofﬁ cial and domestic duties (as we learn from recently monumen in Rom dis co vered ts e) . TH E EPISTLES OF TH E IMPRISONM ENT 109

o r no t that whether with little with much , thou only, but s uch also all that hear me this day, might become as I ”

these bonds . d C am , except (Acts xxvi ( ) Both olos sians and Philippians are written in the name Of Paul and of Timothy, but we ﬁnd no trace the latter in connection ’ e with Paul s imprisonment at C aesarea . ( ) The great metropolis of the world was a much more likely refuge O than C aesarea for a runaway slave like nesimus . With regard to the order in which these four epistles to were written, many critics have been disposed assign

a later Philippians to . date than the three others . But none Of their arguments when examined appear to have P — much weight . hilemon which can be shown to be 1 1 8 — f contemporaneous with C olossians ( see p . ) af ords as probable an indication of having been written when the 23 imprisonment was drawing to a close (ver . ) as anything

P . to be found in hilippians We cannot, however, infer ’ much fromsuch expressions, as the apostle s prospects may have undergone various vicissitu des during his imprison on ou r ment . We are safer ground when we base judgment n of o the general character the several epistles . When we do so we are led to the conclusion that this epistle marks the transition from Romans to Colossians and

Ephesians . While the former Of these resembles it in 1 many points both verbal and doctrinal, we discern in the two latter a new phase of doctrine Of which scarcely any . E to P trace can be found in the pistle the hilippians . P While hilippians, therefore, was probably anterior in

1 - m . 8 1 1 . P l . . 3 8 Ro . P . 1 m Cf . 0 Ro . 1 8 P . iii hi i , i hil i , . ii ; hil .

m x1l . 1 . . 9 R m . 3 o . P o m 4 5 R . P . iii. 1 0 1 1 Ro . vi 5 . , , hil iii , x hil , , . In a gen eral sens e the similarity Of th es e two epistles as contrasted with C olossians and Ephesians may b e accounted for by the former e n addre ed to C urc e in E u ro e the er to the theOSO hic b i g ss h h s p , latt p Christians Of A sia Min or ; but if Philippians had been written sub s e uen to em cou d c rce e ed to e r er d nc q tly th , it l s a ly hav fail b a v y isti t traces of the speculative qu estions which had so recently engaged the ’ e en on apostl s att ti . 1 1 0 TH E NE W TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

’ to h f date the t ree others, the ef ects which the apostle s bonds are stated to have already produced in Rome ’ (i . as well as the account of Epaphroditus mission r P to R f om hilippi ome, with its attendant circumstances imply that some considerable time had elapsed ’ since the apostle s arrival . We may therefore assign this

62 . to A. D epistle the early part of , and the three others 1 to of or 3 A D the close the same year the beginning of 6 . .

“ TH E E PISTLE o r PAUL TH E APOSTLE TO TH E PH ILIPPIANS

Authorshi — The P of l . p auline authorship this epistle is generally admitted . It is a characteristic outpouring ’ o f f the apostle s tender, af ectionate, and devout heart ; m to the circu stances which gave rise it come out in the . course o f the epistle in a casual and unaffected manner ; and corroboration of them is found in the Book Of Acts diﬂi ul and elsewhere . It is c t to imagine what purpose or ho w a forger could have had , he could ever have achieved success, in fabricating a letter Of such a dis tinctly personal characte r . to e With regard ext rnal evidence , traces Of expressions used in the epistle may be found in many of the earliest Christian writers (outside of the New Testament) whose o f works have come down to us . By the close the second century its general acceptance in the C hurch is beyond f n i o . O e the poss bility doubt writer (Tertullian, about

1 It is po ss ible the apo stle may have written other letters during His n e ou his own ros ec did no his impris onment . a xi ty ab t p p ts t prevent him from engaging in ac tive labour among the soldiers and rou n o co n c him or rom u er n en d n me ns o thers b ght i t ta t with , f s p i t i g by a of his co lleagues and en vo ys the various Churches which looked to d n c In connec on the o o n n me occur him for gui a e. this ti f ll wi g a s he e e — Lu e T m o o n r em e u u u in t pistl s k , i thy, J h Ma k , D as , J s s J st s, roditu of P T c cu of E e u E r of Epaph s ( hilippi), y hi s ( ph s s), paph as (

o s ae and r t rc u T e on c . Co l s ), A is a h s (Of h ssal i a)

1 1 2 TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

o f of . the two a slave, the absolute property her master The consecrating inﬂuence of the Gospel on family relations is brought out here for the ﬁrst time in the ’ “ ” C - L history of the hurch , ydia s household being “ z w bapti ed ith her, and the jailor rejoicing greatly with ” all his house . The prominence assigned to women both here and in the neighbouring Churches o f Thessalonica 4 2 . 3 1 3 1 f. 2 e oe . o . and B r a (Acts xvi Acts xvii , iv , ) is in harmony with what we know from other sources to of 1 have been characteristic Macedonian society . ’ Paul s visit to Philippi was memorable not only for the converts whom he made but also for the sufferings he endured and the signal deliverance that was granted to C u him . The h rch which he then formed excelled all others in its devoted attachment to his person and its f repeated acts o generosity to him . This generosity he

c to of his ac epted , contrary his ordinary rule, because perfect conﬁdence in the sincerity and affection of the

donors . We hear Of two subsequent visits which the apostle — 5 5 D P in 8 A . . 2 Hi to 7 . s paid hilippi and (Acts xx ,

experience on these occasions, as well as in other com mu n ications i wh ch he held with them, had done much to fo r cheer his heart . In their contributions the relief o f the poor saints at Jerusalem they appear to have con c m tributed , in o mon with the other Macedonians, even ” “ ” “ beyond their power in much proof o f affliction “ ” 2 r o . 1 and deep poverty ( C viii .

Dat e and P a e Of C m o i ion — At R 61 - 62 3. l c o p s t ome, 1 08 A . D . . (see pp , ’ n d n — i S P C s . t 4 hara t a C ten O . . c er o t all aul s epistles Of this is the most benign, breathing a spirit the warmest

1 The extant Macedonian in scriptions s eem to assign to the s ex a higher so cial inﬂuence than is common among the civilis ed nations o f L o antiquity ( ightf ot) . PHILIPPIANS 1 1 3

1 sympathy and approval . At chap . iv . he addresses the “ P as o hilippians my brethren beloved and l nged for, ” h my joy and crown . In t is respect it surpasses even 1 s Thes alonians, which it resembles not a little in its in gentle an d conﬁd g tone . o f Without any assertion apostolic authority, it begins with a very full thanksgiving for the tokens of grace which the Philippians had so generally manifested since

the Gospel was preached among them . These tokens led the apostle to cherish a confident persuasion that they would advance more and more in the C hristian life and realise a fulfilment of his constant prayer on their h 1 1 be alf ( . He own then adverts to his circumstances, and refers to the salutary influence Of his bonds in witnessing for Christ among the imperial guard and in the city gener

ally, while his friends were stimulated by his example, and even his enemies were provoked to greater activity 1 G on his account . The preaching of the ospel by these

latter, however unworthy their motives, he regards as better than none for those who know not C hrist ; and instead Of troubling himself about their Opposition to him, he will rather take comfort from their labour, feeling

assured that all his trials will work together for good .

He or for of is prepared either for life death, as the will the L n ord may be, although he has a stro g impression that he will be delivered and permitted to visit Philippi once

more ( i . In any case he would appeal to them to be ﬁrm and united in defence Of Christ’s cause— mounting it a token of salvation that they are permitted “ not only

1 T e e faction s e c er 1 5 1 ma h s t a h s (1. 7) y either have been Judaisers - 9 or n n om n f cf. iii . 1 c . . 1 8 The e r m a e ( ) A ti ia s ( iii , latt y hav ’ res ented the apostle s warnin gs again st their exaggeration and perver on o f the Go e and con der on for he e Rom t . . etc . si sp l, his si ati J ws ( vi , ) an d e ma e r ed in co n e uence to l his u or and th y y hav t i , s q , s ight a th ity urt i his n uence dur n m r onmen c a l i ﬂ i g his i p is t . 8 1 14 THE NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

ff to believe on him , but also to su er in his behalf 1 2 ( . 7 H e would counsel them to avoid all rivalry

- to and self seeking, and cultivate that humility which was L C so signally displayed by the ord Jesus hrist, and was i H e attended in H s case with such glorious results . exhorts them to work o ut their salvation with fear and ’ ’ trembling as in God s presence and with God s help . striving to walk worthy Of their calling and to justify ’ the apostle s boast concerning them . They might rest te assured that he was as devo d to their interests as ever, to and was ready, if need be, give up his life on their He to ri behalf. hoped soon send to them their mutual a d o f trusty friend Timothy with news his prospects, and in return he hopes to hear o f their sta te before he visits them in person . Meanwhile he is sending to them E paphroditus, the messenger Of their bounty, who has o f bu t been invaluable service to him since his arrival, whose recent illness and anxiety 0 11 their account render it expedient that he should return to Philippi 1 At this point ( iii . ) it would seem as if the apostle — had intended to draw to a close probably by a renewal of his co unsels to unity and brotherly love . But from some cause— perhaps owing to his being interrupted by — fresh n ews of the Ju dais ers he launches into a new o f subject, warning his converts against the infatuation those who would put their conﬁdence in Jewish rights or

o privileges, and av wing his own renunciation of all such claims, in view of the new life which comes from fellow ship with the risen and exalted C hrist . That life cannot be realised without strenuous and persevering effort in f H e the path o duty . would therefore caution them against the gross abuse of the doctrines of grace which

o f some are guilty , and he bids them take his own life as an example of the C hristian course . In the last chapter

Of he returns to the subject the dissensions among them,

C H A PT E R XV

— C OLO SSIANS PH ILE MON

TH E EPISTLE OF PAUL TH E AP OSTLE TO TH E C OLOSSIANS

— 1 . Au horshi . P o f t p The auline authorship this epistle, as well as of that to the Ephesians (which it closely resembles) , has of recent years been called in question , not fo r r any want Of exte nal evidence , but because of its peculiar ph raseology as compared with the earlier epistles

f . of P . o aul This Objection, however, is one little force It ’ is no u ncommon thing fo r a writer s vocabulary to undergo o f S a considerable change in the course a very hort period , when he is placed amid new surroundings and under the 1 inﬂuence o f new associations . Anything strange about ’ the apostle s lan guage in this epistle is sufficiently ex and plained by the circumstances under which he wrote, was evidently occasioned by the new errors which he was called to encounte r.

It is alleged, however, that we have in this epistle, not only novelty in language, but also in doctrine, especially f with regard to the nature and O ﬁce Of C hrist . But the

' tru th is we have in the C hristology 0 1 this epistle only the full development of ideas which had germinated in

1 A c o e e m n tion o f the ork of eno on for e m e has l s xa i a w s X ph , xa pl , brought to light a remarkable variation of language in the b o oks he m e ce e o e ou ro P u . wro te after he b egan to m v ab t f plac to pla lik St . a l COLOSSIANS 1 1 7

’

I . . 1 1 C o r. the apostle s mind years before ( Thess i ; viii .

6 3 2 o r C . . , xi . iv and are to be found in other books 3 f 1 H b . o the New Testament ( John i . ; e . i In the

5 - 1 1 notable passage in Philippians (ii . ) regarding the o f S original glory and the ultimate exaltation the aviour, as lofty a claim is made on His behalf to the reverence and adoration o f the Church as is anywhere to be found

in this epistle .

r too It is wo thy of note, , that this epistle has a special mark o f genuineness in the singular connection which

- E P . 7 1 8 subsists between it and the pistle to hilemon (iv ,

P 2 1 0- 1 2 23 hilemon , , , “ 2 . The Readers To the saints and faithful breth C ” ren in hrist which are at Colossae . The Church at Colossae seems to have been the least important Of the C P hurches to which aul is known to have written . The o n e city itself had at time been populous and important, but its prosperity was very much reduced before the days

. L Of the apostle It lay on the river ycus, a tributary of

a P o f the M eander in the hrygian part Asia Minor, not many miles distant from its more prosperous neighbours, L H i in aodicea and ierapolis ( v. a sombre and melan chol y region covered with the traces of volcanic action . C a In common with these cities, oloss e had doubtless been indebted for its knowledge Of C hristianity to the evangel istic o f P E of labours aul at phesus, the metropolis the district, from which his inﬂuence had spread far and

1 T conn ec on suc the e er to em his ti is h , that if l tt Phil on b e genuine ener dm ed C o o n mu e e b (as g ally a itt ), l ssia s st lik wis e so oth erwis e it mu be or er ounded on P i emon B ut hi een o b st a f g y f h l . t s is s t e very unlik ely wh en it is remembered that in the Epistle to Philemon ere no men on e er of Co o ae or an ce in n th is ti what v l ss , Of y pla its eigh b ourhoo d nor et of the me en er T c cu 2 r a , y ss g y hi s ( ) the e re variations in the u ons sen in the two e e uc we can c rce sal tati t pistl s , s h as s a ly imagine to have been res orted to in the in teres ts Of forgery and ( 3) in C o lo ssians th ere is n o reference whatever to Philemon hims elf o r to the e zuliar c rcum nce One mu run e p i sta s Of si s as a away slav . THE NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

“ ” 1 0 2 6 wide, almost throughout all Asia (Acts xix . , ; r I C o . xvi . Although we may infer from his language 1 P in the epistle (ii . ) that aul had not personally laboured C among the olossians, it would seem that their chief E on e o f . 7 evangelist, paphras, had been his disciples (i ,

R V. ) ’ This Epaphras had paid a visit to Rome during Paul s imprisonment there . Whether he had come fo r the express purpose of consulting the apostle regarding the state of the Colossians is not clear but at all events he made Paul acquainted with the dangers that were b e setting the Church notwithstanding many tokens Of grace 20 i 1 2 8 v. C 38 . a (i . ; ii ; , The interest in oloss e which was thus awakened in the mind of the apostle by his conversation with Epaphras was further stimulated c O by his inter ourse with nesimus, a runaway slave from a o r the s me city, who was in some way other brought u R under his inﬂ ence at ome, and proved an invaluable H 9 . P . e friend (iv . , cf hilemon) could not permanently t O re ain nesimus in his service, as he was the lawful ff property Of another, so he took the opportunity a orded by the mission of Tychicus (a trusty delegate) to Asia

- 1 2 O 4 2 . . 9 . (iv . 7 ; Acts xx ; Tim iv ) to send nesimus along with him , giving the latter a conciliatory letter to 1 2 1 his maste r Philemon (pp . and at the same time he addresses a longer communication to the members Of C s C to the olos ian hurch, with special reference the evils to which they were exposed . This he entrusts to the

o f care Tychicus, by whom he also despatches another E h epistle intended for a still wider circle Of readers ( p . 2 1 vi . ,

Da e and Pla e of C m si i n — At R 62 - 63 3. t c o p o t o ome, 1 08 D . A. . (pp har t r and C n n s — It d 4 . C ac e o te t has been remarke that this epistle lacks the vi vacity and ﬂuency which

1 20 TH E NEW TESTAM ENT AND ITS WRITERS lowest o f which was supposed to have been far enough removed from the Supreme Being to be capable of bringing into existence the base material world. In Oppo sition to this theory the apostle insists upon the — absolute and universal mediatorship o f C hrist in the w t H im 1 6 out ard universe crea ed through (i . ) as well as

r H e H 1 in the Chu ch of which is the ead ( . and warns his converts against being led astray by a false philo

Sophy, associated with the worship of angels, which some of their teachers were trying to introduce into the

C hurch . On its pra ctical side the error took the form of a ’ rigorous asceticism, intended to free man s spirit from the degrading inﬂuence of the world and the ﬂesh . TO counteract this tendency, the apostle proclaims the inspiring and life - giving power of fellowship with Jesus C C has hrist, by whose death upon the ross reconciliation f been ef ected between heaven and earth, and in whom f ” dwelleth all the fulness o the Godhead bodily . The spirit o f C hrist ought to raise C hristians above the mere “ ” o r u o f elements r diments the world, imparting to them new motives and a higher consciousness ; and the ” apostle calls upon his readers to consecrate “ in Christ all departments Of their personal and social life . While the speculative and practical aspects of the subject are not kept entirely distinct, the former is

chieﬂy dealt with in the ﬁrst chapter, after the opening

salutation , thanksgiving, and prayer ; while the second e chapt r is more polemical in tone, and forms an intro duction to the practical exhortations which occupy the third and part o f the fourth or last chapter . The

7 - 1 8 remainder of the epistle (iv . ) is occupied with salu

tatio ns and personal explanations and directions . In several passages a reference may be traced to the intellectual pride and exclusiveness which were associated PH ILEMON 1 2 1

C with the errors of the C olossian hurch . Among its

r the Jewish membe s , the pride Of intellect was taking f place Of the Old pride o nationality . In opposition “ ” to this tendency the apostle declares that in C hrist no t in any philosophy which man could devise are all the treasures Of wisdom and knowledge hidden “ H e (ii . prays that they may be ﬁlled with the knowledge of his will in all spiritual wisdom and 1 H e G understanding ( . represents the ospel as a “ mystery ” that has been “ manifested to the whole C — C hurch his duty as an apostle being to proclaim hrist,

admonishing every man , and teaching every man in all wisdom ; that he may present every man perfect in ” 5 - 2 2 H 2 8 . e C C . hrist (i ii , thus declares the hurch to be a spiritual democracy in which there is no room or of — for any privileged class inner circle disciples, even S the cythians, the least reﬁned of nations, being raised to the same level , in a spiritual sense, as the Jews them f G or o . selves, the most cultivated the entiles (iii

“ TH E E PISTLE OF PAUL TO PH ILEMON

A th s i — P 1 . u or h p This epistle is thoroughly auline ; and its contents are of to o private and (from a doctrinal and ecclesiastical point Of view) too insigniﬁcant a nature to have ever been admitted into the Canon if it had not f P ’ 1 been a genuine writing o aul s .

1 “ It re er ed in the m to c was ddre ed and was p s v fa ily whi h it a ss , re d ﬁr no dou rec ou o o c me a e of o e and e n a st, bt, as a p i s ap st li ss g l v bl ssi g, ’ th C urc i c em ed in P emon ou e T en co e in e h h wh h ass bl hil s h s . h pi s Of it ec me mu ed and ro m C o o ae re d rou the C urc b a ltipli , f l ss it sp a th gh h h I uo ed ar h n un er . t e t e econd ce ur and has e er iv sal is q t as ly as s t y, v , e ce ome few who ue on e er n rem ned an undou ed x pt with s q sti v ythi g, ai bt ”

or on of the r n of . P u ord H ow to Stud the N ew p ti w iti gs St a l (Alf , y

Tes ta men t . It r c ed in ue t on in the our cen ur on ) was ﬁ st all q s i f th t y, the ground that its matt er and contents were beneath the dignity o f apostolic authorship 1 1 2 2 THE N EW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

Its close connection with C olossians has already been

referred to . The circumstances under which it reached P ’ hilemon, and even the latter s place of residence, would h C be s rouded in mystery if it were not for olossians . ’ Yet no hint is given there of the episode in Paul s life which gave rise to this epistle — the only thing relating to it being an allusion to Onesimus as “ the ” on e of C ol faithful and beloved brother who is you ( . So iv . independent are the two epistles in their contents .

2 . The Reader. To P our hilemon beloved, and ” - fellow worker . ’ TO P ascertain hilemon s residence we have, as already d E to C remarke , to consult the pistle the olossians . Philemon himself is no t mentioned there but Archippus whom Paul associates with Philemon and Apphia (prob ’ ably Philemon s . wife) in the opening greeting of this C epistle, is mentioned in olossians in such a way as to imply that he was an Ofﬁce - bearer o f the C hurch either at C olossae o r in the neighbourhood (iv . From the 1 5 1 6 has L context (iv . , ) it been suggested that aodicea, C a which was about twelve miles from oloss e, was the ’ of scene of Archippus labours . The association his name

o f P the with that hilemon , in the epistle addressed to

o to latter, w uld lead us suppose that he was either ’ n Philemon s son or possibly his minister . The co nection o f Philemon with C olossae is fu rther evident from the fact that his slave Onesimus is spoken of in the Epistle to the “ ” C on e o f olossians as you, and is announced as a visitor 9 ' to C olossae (C ol. iv . ) at the same time as he is restored to his master (Philemon We gather from the epistle that Philemon had been converted to C hristianity through the instrumentality Of fo r the apostle, and had since then earned a reputation charity and devotion, his house being one of the meeting

1 24 THE NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS the apostle puts the case very strongly in favour of — Onesimus so strongly that it has been ﬁnely said the word emancipation seems trembling o n his ” ’ —he P lips, refrains from any interference with hilemon s civil rights, seeking only to awaken within him such feelings Of humanity and kindness as will be a safe s guard against har h and unbrotherly conduct . In this respect the epistle affords a good illustration o f the remedial and reforming inﬂuence of the G to ospel , which seeks gain its ends from within r and not f om without, by persuasion rather than by com 1 pulsion . It has been described as the letter Of a Christian C gentleman, animated by strong hristian feeling, tem pered with discretion , and expressed with dignity and o 2 moderation not unt uched with humour . The whole

' tone and structure of the lette r was well ﬁtted to bring o ut the better nature o f Philemon and it was doubtless — to strengthen the appeal by making Philemon realise that the eyes of his fellow - Christians were upon him that Paul associates Timothy with himself in his Opening to P greeting, which is addressed not hilemon alone, but to C of also other hristian members his household, and to

1 B eac in the un er a ro er ood of men in e us C r y t h g iv s l b th h J s h ist, and dm ttin all l e to ull commun o n in the C urc the o e a i g a ik f i h h , ap stl s brought an influence to bear u pon society which could not fail in course of m e to e d to the o ion of er and c er oon led to ti l a ab lit slav y , whi h v y s voluntary efforts on the part o f congregations to purchase the freedom o f e r e - mem er well to c n e o f oc en men th i slav b s, as as a ha g s ial s ti t with o e who rem ned in er I n the me ur ed regard to th s ai slav y. as es pass Con n ne the r Chri i n Em eror for me or n the by sta ti , fi st st a p , a li ati g co ndi on e we e the ni on of mo emen c to ti Of slav s , hav i tiati a v t whi h was uhninate in the n ne een cen ur in the o on o f er rou c i t th t y, ab liti slav y th gh out the Br i Em re the i er on Of en m ons er it sh pi , l b ati tw ty illi Of s fs by th Em eror of Ru a the em nc on of the ne ro in the Un ed e p ssi , a ipati g it “ e o f m eri c and the n ef or to e the en ore o f the Stat s A a, fi al f t h al Op s on en wo rld in the dark c tin t Of Africa . 2 “ In er e 1 1 ere on the n me On e mu c in v s th is a play a si s, whi h “ ” ro e the original means p fitabl . PHILEMON 1 25

the congregation meeting for worship in his house . He also sends salutations from several others whose names are given at the close, and even throws out a hint that it may not be long before he visits Philemon in person (verse C H A PT E R XVI

TH E E PISTLE OF PAUL TH E APOSTLE TO TH E EPH E SIANS

1 Authorshi — o n e . p As regards external evidence, this is ’ o f the best- attested of Paul s epistles and until recently its genuineness was never doubted . n C Inter ally it bears a strong resemblance to olossians, 7 8 Of its 1 5 5 verses containing expressions that are also O found in that epistle . N doubt the resemblance is due to the fact that the two epistles were written at the same n time o kindred subjects to kindred C hurches . In both epistles Tychicus is referred to in similar terms as the ’ apostle s messenger ; and they both bear to have been 2 1 2 2 e . writt n by the apostle while he was a prisoner (vi , l f C o . iv . 7 From the occurrence o the signiﬁcant word ” a also in the parallel pass ge Of this epistle, we may infer that it was written later than the other, although — but a few days may have interv ened the closing verses

C 1 5 - 1 8 o f olossians (iv . ) having been subsequently added .

As might have been expected under the circumstances, the similarity between the two epistles does not extend to i cont nuous passages, but is conﬁned to single verses and occasional expressions such as would be likely to remain in the writer ’s memory and reappear in his lan guage if he were writing a second time within a very short interval .

1 28 TH E NE W TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

can There be little doubt, indeed, that we have here C ol 1 6 the epistle referred to in . iv . , where the apostle directs the C olossians to read also “ the epistle from L to aodicea, and send their own letter in exchange, for

o f C E the beneﬁt the hristians there . ven before the middle o f the second century we ﬁnd a heretical writer “ ” (Marcion) giving this epistle the title To the Laodiceans . Ye t it is evident that it could n o t have been specially r L a add essed to aodice , as the apostle sends his salutations “ ” to the brethren that are in Laodicea through another ff channel (C o l. iv . The di iculty is met by supposing — that we have here a circular letter of which Laodicea received a copy in common with other Churches of the — to m to province, be co municated the neighbouring

o f E C church at Colossae . The name the phesian hurch would naturally become associated with the epistle owing to a C its being the le ding hurch Of the district, probably receiving the ﬁrst Oopy from Tychicus when he landed t o n C a at its por his way to oloss e, and becoming the source o f many later copies to C hurches in other parts Of the world . — 3 Da e and Pla e of Com o n At R 62 - 63 . t c p sitio ome,

A . D 108 . ( see pp . C a t er and C nt nts — It har . 4 . c o e has been said by C oleridge that this is o n e o f the divinest compositions o f C o f man . It embraces every doctrine hristianity ; to C ﬁrst, those doctrines peculiar hristianity ; secondly, ” those precepts common to it with natural religion . In

- i . its doctrinal part ( . iii ) the epistle is distinguished by a o f not o tone exultation which will st op to controversy, expressing itself in the ﬂow of a sublime eloquence rather than in the form of a logical argument . Instead of h u n of the o c o c C urc is eminen u e for u c t e ity h ly ath li h h, tly s itabl s h a letter and Asia Min or was rapidly becoming the leading province o f “ r en dom Rev 1. 4 : o n to the e en C urc e c ar Ch ist ; cf. . J h s v h h s whi h e ” in As ia. E PH ESIANS 1 29

to labouring demonstrate those truths, regarding the standing Of the Gentiles and his own position as the o f G apostle the entiles, for which he had contended in

his earlier epistles, the writer takes these things for

and — granted , soars into far loftier regions viewing the G C ospel and the hurch in relation not to time, but to

eternity, not to the nations Of the world , but to the H C P universe at large . ere, as in olossians, aul recognises C hrist as the appointed Head of the universe— material — as well as spiritual and sees in His atoning death the H universal centre Of divine providence . ere, as there, he is thrilled with a sense of joy n ot untouched with awe when he contemplates the great mystery o f the divine — God will the eternal purpose of so long concealed , but no w at length revealed and so far realised through his o f instrumentality, to wit, the destined union Jew and Gentile in the mystical body of the risen and exalted

C hrist. In this union he sees the pledge and token of that universal gathering together in one o f all things in

C r u h ist, the things in the heavens, and the things pon the ” G ’ earth , which is to be the consummation Of od s purposes C C . in hrist (i But, whereas in olossians he dwells “ mainly on the person of Christ as the fulness of the G d odhead bo ily, here he is impelled rather to the con “ tem lation o f Chu rch o f C p the as the body hrist, the l ﬁlleth fu ness Of him that all in all , and expatiates upon the ideal glory and ri ches of the spiritual blessing with which its members are blessed in heavenly places 1 in C hrist .

1 “ The word 5 t or spiritu al o ccurs thirteen times in this “ ” “ ” e i e the heavenlies ﬁve ime the r ce o f Go d r een p stl , t s , g a thi t

me . Pro Find The E is tles o P aul . 1 80 u e the ti s f. lay ( p f , p ) s gg sts that “ ’ amplitude of style which is a new feature in the apo stle s manner as ” “ a writer was due perhaps to the leisure o f prison an d the habit Of ” meditation which it fo stered ; and he po ints o ut that it is not

- o e er en rom C o o n . 9 1 1 1 6 2 0 2 alt g th abs t f l ssia s (i , , 7 9 1 30 TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS The ﬁrst half of the epistle is thus for the most part a hymn of praise for the grace o f God manifested accord ing to His good pleasure which H e had purposed in ’ himself, accompanied with the apostle s prayer for his readers that they may realise the glory Of their calling . H C ’ G l ence it was alvin s favourite epistle, as a atians was of Luther . In the second part the apostle descends by a swift “ o f and beautiful transition to the duties common life, I r L ou therefore, the p isoner in the ord , beseech y to walk ” worthily o f the calling wherewith ye were called (iv . H e thus introduces a series o f practical exhortations based o n the ideal unity of the Chu rch as the harmonious o f C body hrist, and embracing the various forms of social and domestic duty to which the new man is called in

the ordinary relations Of life . Finally there is a stirring call to put on the whole armour of Go d for the conﬂict of n with the powers evil , expressed in the la guage Of a metaphor which may have been suggested to Paul by his u o R military s rr undings at ome, and forming a passage f of o great force and beauty, which itself would make

this epistle a precious heritage of the Church . The catholic nature Of this epistle shows that the ’ - . S apostle s education was well nigh complete The aviour, whom he only knew at his conversion as the Risen One has to dwelling in another world , become him as an all pervading Presence which may be realised even now in of o f f the sphere common life, as the type all af ection all S and the centre Of authority, in the tate and in the 1 family as well as in the C hurch . During his residence R ’ at ome, the seat of empire and the centre of the world s P secular life, aul learned , as he had never yet done, the

1 C o m re for e m e e of marr e the or n n pa , xa pl , his vi w iag , igi al a d cen r re ion u m n e in e e 2 and t al lat ship Of h a lif , this pistl (v. 2 in i n o u ﬁ 1 C o r. x r e ve e r e ore . ( ), w itt ab t y a s b f

C H A PT E R XVII

TH E PASTORAL E PISTLES

1 and 2 Timothy and Titus are known as the Pastoral

E a pistles, bec use they relate chieﬂy to the qualiﬁcations and duties Of Office - bearers entrusted with the pastoral f care o the Church . They are distinguished from all the other epistles of Paul by their want of historical agreement with any period in the life Of the apostle as recorded in the Book o f s - Act , and also by their strongly marked individuality H alike in style and substance . ence their genuineness has been more called in question than any of the other — epistles o f Paul notwithstanding a large amount of extern al testimony in their favour .

to on The objections taken them, however, those grounds are almost entirely obviated if we suppose them to have been written subsequently to the events narrated o f in the Book Acts. This is a supposition that in itself ’ P o wn involves no improbability . It was aul s expecta 2 4 2 2 P . . P . tion ( hil ii ; hilemon , ver ) that he would be released from the imprisonment in which the Book Of Acts leaves him ; and for this expectation he seems to have had suffi cient grounds in the inadequacy of the evidence brought against him, as well as in the tolerant attitude Of the Roman Government previous to the great TH E PASTORAL EPISTLES 1 33

ﬁre in Rome (64 which was falsely attributed to the C hristians and brought terrible persecutions in its 1 train . Moreover, there is an early and general tradition to the effect that he was released . Assuming that his ffi o f liberation did take place, the di culty harmonising the epistles with his life disappears while the late date — o f their composition possibly so me years after his release — would go far to account for the peculiarity f f o their contents . It is no wonder that questions o discipline and government as well as o f orthodoxy should now receive from the apostle a larger measure of attention than they had done hitherto, considering the C growing needs Of the hurch, arising from the gradual expansion Of its organisations as a corporate body held n together by a common creed . The C hurch had o w been for many years a visible institution with Office bearers Of its o wn ; and important doctrines had been TO vindicated and established . conserve these doctrines and to provide for the regular superintendence of the C had hurch after he and the other apostles passed away, ’ 2 was Paul s great Object in writing these epistles . The idea that the epistles may have been the products of a later age is in many respects untenable . Both as

Oﬂi ce - regards the bearers mentioned, namely, bishops of and deacons, and the doctrinal needs and dangers the

1 “ ’ If P u r had re u ed in con c on and un men a l s t ial s lt vi ti p ish t, it wo uld have formed a precedent which mu st have been followed in r c e for con der e ime re ou o 4 A D — the more othe as s a si abl t p vi s t 6 . . all so c u e he Rom n c en But ncon en the be a s was a a itiz . this is i sist t with f ms E x os r u emen o T c u Pro . R ito stat ts a it s ( f a ay, p , J ly 2 f w u e e r e n u on o n e ord i . ord n ot e e ere d Th la g i f si w s ( e. w s ls wh s by the ap ostle) is in accordance with the gradual expansion o f his ’ oc u r c is e den on com r on of P u ucce e v ab la y, whi h vi t a pa is a l s s ssiv ri n and in r cu r m n of e e ord are new m w ti gs ; , pa ti la , a y th s w s si ply becaus e the things they signify had not previously come within the ’ h e c n For mu b e remem ered the scope of t e apostle s t a hi g. it st b that P u Pastoral Epistles differ widely from the other writings Of St . a l e re rd eir rec en — r end and co e ue not con alik as ga s th ipi ts f i s ll ag s,

- gregations and the ecclesiastical questions with which they deal . 1 34 THE NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

C Of hurch, they remind us far more the state Of things ’ u P R existing d ring aul s ﬁrst imprisonment at ome , when P C he wrote hilippians and olossians, than of anything in o f the second century . By the latter time the name “ bishop ” had been appropriated to a chief dignitary “ the o r ruling over presbyters elders, instead Of being applied as here to the presbyters themselves as the over f 5 f o . 7 o . . seers the congregation (Titus i , , Acts xx

o “ More ver, the knowledge falsely so called which is denounced in these epistles comes far short Of the elabo e G rat nosticism Of the second century, which set itself to in direct opposition the orthodox faith, and repudiated 1 all aﬂi nity with the Jewish law .

“ THE FI RST E PISTLE o r PAUL TH E APOSTLE ” To TIMOTH Y

1 Authorshi . p . The strong external evidence in favour Of the genuineness Of this epistle has been already h f mentioned . We can hear ec oes o its language as far s back as the close Of the fir t century . A hundred ’ a P years later we find it univers lly accepted as aul s, although it had been rejected in the course o f the second 2 one o r century by two heretical writers, owing to the difli culty o f reconciling its teaching with their favourite tenets . In a general sense its peculiarities in language and

1 The erro rs which the ap ostle h ere co mbats are evidently of a ue and u n orm ed c r c er n ur er de e o men he vag f ha a t , awaiti g f th v l p t, as indicates by his references to the future and in particu lar they bear traces Of that semi - Jewish character which we know to have belonged to C r i n Gno c m in e r er e . In re ec e h ist a sti is its a li stag s this sp t, as w ll as in the mor d ce c m ro e ed the e e c er the corru bi as ti is p f ss by fals t a h s, pt form Of Christian ity that meets us h ere is very similar to that which de in the E e to the C o o s n — but e i ed in is alt with pistl l s ia s , xh bit a o somewhat ranker gr wth . 2 d Marcion and Basili es .

1 36 THE NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

— “ 2 . The Read r e . Unto Timothy, my true child in ” ’ faith . The disciple thus addressed was o n e of the apostle s e d converts, and b came his dearest friend and coa jutor in f the closing years of his life . O a pious Jewish family ’ — — by the mother s side his father was a Greek he re ceived a strict religious training in the scriptures of the

Old - 5 1 2 . 1. 1 1 4 Testament (Acts xvi . Tim ; iii . , H e seems to have been converte d to Christianity during ’ P to L r D o n aul s ﬁrst visit yst a and erbe for, the ’ apostle s second visit to that quarter about three years

t well re orted of af erwards , Timothy was a disciple so p ' by the brethren at Lystra and Iconium as to be deemed worthy of being associated with Paul as a labourer in

2 . 2 l 1 . 2 . . 10 1 1 G t . the ospel (Ac s xvi , ; Tim i ; Tim iii , ,

Of. Acts xiv . To this position he was duly ordained

o n o f by the laying hands, after being circumcised to 3 1 render him more acceptable to the Jews (Acts xvi . ; 2 1 . 1 4 2 . 1. Tim . vi . ; iv ; Tim Thereafter we find him constantly associated with the apostle either as his companion o r as his delegate to C hurches at a distance — although his influence seems to have been somewhat weakened by a certa in timidity and softness of disposi tion . He was with the apostle during his first imprison R ment at ome, being associated with him in three of the

P . P C ol. four epistles which aul then wrote ( hil , , and

Philemon) . From this epistle we gather that after the apostle ’s release Timothy was left for a time in charge o f the C hurch at Ephesus ; and it was while in this trying and responsible position that he received the two epistles that hea r his name . 3 Da e and Pl e of C m osi on — . t ac o p ti The ﬁrst epistle seems to have been sent to Timothy from Macedonia 3 under the circumstances referred to in i . but whether P ’ P P before or after aul s intended visits to hilippi ( hil . — C a P . S ii . oloss e ( hilemon , ver and pain which, 1 TIMOTHY 137 according to an ancient tradition originating in the ﬁrst 4 — u Ro m . . 2 it im os cent ry, he did visit ( xv ) is quite p sible to say . Various routes have been sketched by which Paul may have travelled after his release from R to ome, comprising visits .the places just mentioned i l E C . . co o i s . and also to phesus, rete (Tit i N p (Tit iii .

2 . 1 3 and Troas ( Tim iv . ) but they are all more or less conjectural . While it is impossible to ascertain the

o f or precise movements the apostle after his release, the exact year in which this epistle was written , we may 64 D A. . safely place its composition between , the year ’

P 67 A . H . after aul s release, and , shortly before his death , — 68 A D the date usually assigned to the latter being . . , of to the last year Nero, under whom, according the

‘ ﬂ r P s u e ed . general tradition, aul martyrdom The most

6 D . A. probable date is 7 , which gives an interval o f several years to account for the change in the apostle ’s C style and in the condition Of the hurch, and makes the three pastoral epistles very nearly contemporaneous . 4 Chara er and C ont nt s — . ct e These have been already 1 32 1 33 indicated in the general remarks at pp . , . The Oflicial l epistle is partly , part y personal . While addressed ’ P in to Timothy individually, it contains aul s apostolic struction s to guide him in the work o f supervision 1 assigned to him at Ephesus (i . The anticipations of evil which Paul had expressed to the Ephesian elders 2 30 s . . 9 at Miletus (Act xx , ) had already in some measure been realised, and there was great need for wisdom in the rulers Of the Church . It is not easy to tra ce any regular sequence in the topics discussed ; but the con tents o f the epistle may be summarised as follows The folly and danger Of the Judaic fancies with which false teachers were overlaying the Gospel (i. ) exhorta tions to catholicity of spirit as well as to reverence and f r decorum in acts o worship (ii . ) the qualifications e 138 TH E N EW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS q uisite in the Offi ce - bearers Of the Church (bishops and deacons), and the need for fidelity and care on their part in view of the increasing corruption counsels re garding Timothy ’s treatment Of the elders and other

iv - classes in the congregation ( . v. ) cautions against t cove ousness, and exhortations to the rich to make a — good use Of their means , concluding with an appeal to

Timothy to guard that which was committed to his trust, “ to and avoid profane babblings, and oppositions Of the ” knowledge which is falsely SO called Although in some respects o n a humbler level intellect ’ u all P of y than most of aul s writings, and bearing traces ’ the writer s advancing years, this epistle contains not a 1 few golden texts to be held in everlasting remembrance .

1 - i. 5 1 5 11 . 3 6 111. 1 6 . 6 , ; ; ; vi ,

1 4 0 T HE N EW TESTAM ENT AND ITS WRITERS represented in his own person the breadth and freedom

G z of the ospel , for which the apostle had so ealously and successfully contended . The conversion Of Titus had taken place at a com ’ in paratively early period the apostle s ministry, for he accompanied Paul and Ba rnabas 0 11 their visit from Antioch to Jerusalem to vindicate the freedom of the l Gentiles fro m the ceremonial law Of the Jews (Ga . ii . 1 We find him figuring prominently at another crisis ’ in the apostle s ministry, when the strife and confusion C in the C orinthian hurch threatened to destroy St . ’ His iffi Paul s influence . remarkable success in the d cult mission then assign ed to him (p . which called of c for the exercise ombined firmness and tact, and from u 1 or which Apollos appears to have shr nk ( C . xvi . o ut marked him as an able and trustworthy delegate, and explains his selection ten yea rs later for the important and difficult position which b e temporarily held in Crete when this letter was addressed to him . Of the state o f the C hurch in C rete we know very little except what may be gathered from this epistle . In all probability the Gospel had been first brought to the island by those Of its inhabitants who witnessed the outpouring Of the spirit on the day of Pentecost

Acts ii . More than thirty years had now passed since then , and there were , probably, quite a o f h number congregations in the island, whic was a hundred and forty miles long and was famous for its hundred cities . P aul had been there once before, on his way from C aesarea to Rome ; but being a prisoner at the time he

or could have had little no Opportunity Of preaching . It

may have been on that occasion, however, that be , saw n the necessity for organising the various co gregations, as he was now seeking to do through the instrumentality Of TITUS 1 4 1

fi . C o Titus It was a dif cult task , for the retans b re a “ L ” bad . character iars , evil beasts, idle gluttons, was the description which had been given o f them long “ o ne E 600 e n o . before by of th mselves ( pimenides, ) r a testimony conﬁrmed by several other ancient w iters . G s They were a mixed population Of reeks and Asiatic ,

with a considerable infusion o f Jews . To the inﬂuence of on n these latter, acting ative superstition , the corrup o f C of tion hristian doctrine, which we hear in the epistle, 1 1 0 1 4 appears to have been largely due ( . , iii .

a d P e f C om osit on . 3. D te an lac o p i The striking resemblance of this epistle to 1 Timothy justiﬁes us in assignn it to the same year (say 67 It may have been written in Asia Minor when the apostle was on his

way to Nicopolis . — 4 . Character and Cont ents Although addressed to 1 a friend, this letter, like Timothy, has to a certain f extent an o ﬁcial character . This is evident from the “ : P o f God of greeting aul, a servant , and an apostle 1 Jesus C hrist (i . It was intended to furnish ’ C the Titus, as the apostle s representative in rete, with same assistance in his work as had already been rendered 1 5 to Timothy . From . it would appear that the apostle of ff had heard opposition being o ered to Titus, and desired to strengthen his hands fo r his arduous under

taking . With this view he gives him directions for the 2 appointment of properly - q ualiﬁed presbyters in every “ city, who should be able and willing to teach the ” n u sound doctrine, and to counteract the useless and

1 In the u e uen i or of the i nd T u ured r s bs q t h st y sla , it s has ﬁg p o - h mmun minently as the patron saint o f t e co ity. 2 It is remarkable that in this epistle there is no mention o f the o er c of thee - e rer the de con who ure so r e in th lass O b a s , a s, ﬁg la g ly T ou d b e un ccoun e the two e e ere 1 Timothy . his w l a tabl if pistl s w cunningly devis ed forgeri es proceeding from the same hand in the ecc e c o de interests of l siasti al r r. 1 42 TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

- in warrantable speculations of a semi Jewish character, volving endless controversy, which were propagated by — H dishonest self seeking teachers . e also reminds Titus Of suitable exhortations to be addressed to the various C classes in the hurch , for the promotion of that practical godliness which ought to accompany sound doctrine . Titus himself is admonished to show himself in all things

an en sample o f good works . of The epistle contains a number memorable sayings, including some o f the most comprehensive statements o f Christian truth to be found in the New Testament

- 1 1 - 4 4 . 1 1 1 1 4 . (ii . ; iii In ii we have an excellent “ illustration o f the doctrine which is according to godli ” - h ness, that sober minded union Of fait and practice, o f C which is the ripest fruit hristianity, and which forms f the chief burden o this most salutary letter . The epistle concl udes with some allusions to personal 1 2 of P matters (iii . in the course which aul bids Titus come to him at Nicopo lis as soon as Artemas or

Tychicus has arrived to relieve him . This is scarcely consiste nt with the view o f some Episcopalian writers that ﬂi i l Titus held a permanent O c a position in the island .

“ TH E SE C OND E PISTLE OF PAUL TH E AP OSTLE ” To TIMOTH Y

Authorshi — Tu 1 . p several passages this epistle bears S P ’ t . the stamp Of genuineness as a writing Of aul s, not

- - 2 2 5 1 8 . 9 . ably at 1. and iv In particular the Opening 3 r o f P thanksgiving (i . ) is cha acteristic aul , eight of his other letters having a similar commencement, which is not to be found in any Of the other epistles of the New h Testament . At the same time t is is not such a promi to nent feature as to lead imitation and, as a matter of

P E . fact, it is not found in the two other astoral pistles

1 4 4 THE NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

to 0 11 objections the latter, the score of their novel language h and teaching, and their want of correspondence wit the 2 Book Of Acts, apply equally to Timothy, it is generally admittedthat the three epistles must stand or fall together . Hence any arg ument for the Pauline authorship of this h epistle has a reﬂex inﬂuence on that of the two ot ers .

he Read r. 2 . T e To Timothy, my beloved child

1. . 1 36 ( see p . — P f C - Dat la e o om o iti n . 8 1 3. e and 6 1 8 c p s o From i , , it is evident that this epistle was written by Paul while ff a priso ner at Rome . That it was a di erent imprison ment from that mentioned in Acts xxviii . may be inferred not only from the general considerations adduced on ’ 1 32 1 33 r pp . , , but more pa ticularly from the apostle s f 6 8 anticipation o a fatal result (iv . ) as compared with his 2 4 P P . . expectation of release in hil ii and hilemon , ver .

1 T ere are e er o er circum nces o e er c us h s v al th sta , h w v , whi h lead to ’ u n 1 The d feren ce e een P the same concl sio . ( ) if b tw aul s p o sition P durin im r onm n c i . 30 1 r e 3 . 1 2 g his ﬁ st p is t (A ts xxvii , ; hil i .

- and at the ime he ro e e e . 9 . 1 5 1 7 2 t w t this pistl (ii ; i ; iv. ( )

The ence of Timo ema and r . 1 0 of om the abs thy, D s, Ma k (iv , wh ﬁrst - n med a o c ed the o e in the e i e to P n a is ss iat with ap stl p stl s hilippia s , Co o n and P lemon and the two er are men oned in C o o l ssia s, hi , latt ti l s

an as end n u on Co l. . 1 0 3 The emen in si s s i g sal tati s ( iv , ( ) stat t “ i e e Eras u o de C orin but Tro mu I e th s pistl , t s ab at th ; phi s l ft at ’ u For in the o e reco rded ourne to Milet s sick (iv . ap stl s last j y eru em Tro mu no t e e u b ut en the J sal phi s was l ft at Mil t s , w t with

- e l m c . 1 4 1 5 and e all the to ru e . apo stl way J sa (A ts xx , xxi ’ for E r stu in Co r n h we no T m o o ne of as a s stay i t , k w that i thy was ’ - P u co m nion c . 1 4 dur n the me ourne er the a l s pa s ( A ts xx ) i g sa j y, aft ’ o e rec orded i to Greece and cou d not e re u red ap stl s last v sit , l hav q i “ ” to be n ormed E r u ode in Co r n had e en the i f that ast s ab i th , if that b occas on re erred to . In u e uen o e rom Cae re to Ro me i f his s bs q t v yag f sa a , as reco rded in the c o n c er of c cer n the l si g hapt s A ts , it is tai that o n 4 r apo stle visited ne ither Miletus n or C ri th . ( ) The eq uest here “ m de to T mo The c o e I e Tro s C r u a i thy : l k that l ft at a with a p s , ” rin en o u co me and the o o e ec the rc men b g wh th st, b ks, sp ially pa h ts ’ For ere was an n er o f e er e r e een P u (iv. th i t val s v al y a s b tw a l s recorded to Tro an d r m r s onmen Rom e last visit as his ﬁ st i p i t at . A u e uen o e er f er re e e ou d in the re s bs q t visit, h w v , a t his l as , w l ﬁt with f sh rn e ro m e u to C or n c eem to b e m ed in j ou y f Mil t s i th, whi h s s i pli the remark abo ve made 2 TIMOTH Y 1 4 5

Such a second imprisonment was in itself not at all

64 . w A . D C s unlikely after the great ﬁre in , hen the hri tian religion was put u nder the ban ; and we know the apostle had no lack o f enemies to give information against

6 A D . 7 . him . If we are right in dating the ﬁrst epistle ,

- 8 we may assign this o n e to 67 6 A . D . — We r and C n n s . 4 . Characte o te t have here the ’ o f the C apostle s last will and testament in favour hurch , in the form o f a farewell charge to his beloved child H e him Timothy . still hoped to see once again , and repeatedly urges him to do his best to come to him “ ” — rac shortly before winter, while navigation is still p ’ icabl i 9 H is t e v. ( , yearning for Timothy s society ’ in his lonely prison reminds us of our Lord s desire fo r the sympathy and prayers o f His disciples on the eve o f ’ His P L assion ; and in this epistle, as in our ord s teach

His d ing during the week preceding eath, there is ’ blended with a sublime conﬁdence in the speaker s o wn of tem ta future, dark foreboding approaching trial and p “ C H e tion for the hurch . warns Timothy of the grievous ” times to come (iii . and exhorts him to adhere stead fastly to the teaching he had received from the apostle “ ” o n S Go d the foundation of the cripture inspired of , and to take security for such teaching being continued “ by faithful men who shall be able to teach others also — own bidding Timothy emulate, his example in the endurance o f hardship and in the practice of self- denial G for the sake of the ospel . A peculiarity of this as of the other pastoral epistles is the introduction of short and weighty statements with “ 1 1 - 1 3 the words, Faithful is the saying . In ii . we o f C have what is probably part a hristian hymn , express ing the faith in which the apostle would have Timothy to meet his trials . C H A PT E R XIX

TH E E PISTLE OF PAUL TH E APOSTLE TO TH E H E BRE WS

A t r — 1 . u ho ship This is a question which cannot be w answered ith any degree of certainty . The earliest o n Pantaenu s in witness the subject is of Alexandria, of the the latter half second century, who assigned the P E . epistle, as usebius tells us, to the Apostle aul In keeping with this o pinion we ﬁnd that the Eastern Church generally regarded it as the work of Paul ; but some o f the most learned of its bishops and teachers were constrained by internal evidence to depart some w hat from the traditional view . Their idea was that P on e o f aul might have written the original , and his disciples have tran slated it into Greek ; or that the u apostle might have supplied the tho ghts, and some O disciple have put them into words . In this sense rigen

o f maintains that the thoughts were worthy the apostle,

God but who it was that wrote the epistle, only knows ” certainly . The opinion of the Western Church was fo r a long time adverse to the Pauline authorship . Clement of R close ome, who wrote before the of the ﬁrst century, frequently quotes the epistle, but never claims for it the authority of Paul . If he believed that the epistle was

r e P ff the i n or w itt n by aul , it is di icult to account for g

1 48 TH E N EW TE STAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

can doued . Nor we even regard it as the translation of H w ’ a ebrew ork of the apostle s, which was a conjecture of of C lement o f Alexandria . Not only is it possessed such a rhetorical grace and ﬁnish as is scarcely attainable

r in a translation , but in seve al other respects it bears unmistakable tokens of having been originally written in G 1 ree k . But although we cannot assign the epistle to

P no o ur St . t aul , this need impair sense of its value as an acknowledged portion o f the New Testament . Its f “ value is independent o its human authorship . If it should be fo und that a noble picture which had been to R attributed aphael was not by that artist, there would no t o n e be masterpiece the less, but one great master

rs the more ( Thie ch) . While the evidence is conclusive against the epistle P having been written by aul , there is yet reason to f P ’ believe that it was the work o one of aul s school . The writer appears to have been acquainted with some ’ ﬁ’ o f Paul s epistles and he uses many words which are found nowhere in the New Testament except in Paul ’s L o r . H e writings , in his speeches as reported by uke — also refers to Timothy as a personal friend although in different terms from those used by the apostle (xiii . ’ By which of Paul s friends o r associates the letter was C L written it is difﬁcult to say . Neither lement nor uke

’ “ me in P u e e but ener e o f H im e u or ti s a l s pistl s), g ally sp aks as J s s , ” ” he rd C r or t Lo . h ist, ’ ( 6 ) Gre ek particles o f frequent o ccurrence in Paul s writings are entirely absent from this epistle while s ome are found here that are never used by Paul . 1 It num erou o n Gree ord an d con n e re o n has s plays k w s , tai s xp ssi s that have no eq uivalent in H ebrew ; it makes its Old Testament uo on d rec rom the e ua n in ome c e e en u d n an q tati s i t f S pt gi t, s as s v b il i g argument o n forms of e xpressio n which do not o ccur in the H ebrew te xt . 2 Of. 11. 8 and 1 C or. . 2 11 . 1 0 and Ro m 7 . . 36 1 1. 1 4 xv ; xi ; , 2

- m. . 1 0 and 1 C or. . 6 1 2 1 4 an d 1 C o r Ti 2 . . . 2 vi 1 0 and i xv ; v iii ; .

1 The . . . 30 and Ro m. . 1 9 . 1 4 and o m 3 R . . 1 ss i ; x xii xii xii 8. H EBREWS 1 4 9

(whose names were suggested as early as the third cen can tury) be credited with the work , so greatly do their f m L ’ styles dif er fro that of the epistle . uther s conjecture that Apollos may have been the writer is favoured by

2 4 - 2 8 o f . the description the latter in Acts xviii , viewed in connection with the internal characteristics of the epistle, and it has been widely accepted . But if Apollos was f the writer, it is di ﬁcult to account for the complete disappearance of his name from the traditions of the C E hurch , more especially in the ast .

l im rob There is another name, in itse f not at all an p o ne o f o f able , for which we have the authority Tertullian C of . arthage, who wrote in the beginning the third century That presbyter refers to Barnabas as the author o f the epistle, in terms which would imply that this was no new supposition ; and his testimony is all the more im portant because he had been at one time resident in Rome and knew what was the current belief of the f n C hurch there . In many respects the name o Bar abas answers the requirements o f the case . As a Jewish Christian who enjoyed the confidence of the apostles and o n C o f was intimate terms with the hurch at Jerusalem, an L which he had been early benefactor ; as a evite, familiar with the usages and customs of the Jewish C u sanctuary ; as a native, and frequent visitor, of ypr s, sufficiently acquainted with Hellenistic literature to be H o ne able to preach to ellenists, and at time (according w to an ancient tradition) a teacher, like his nephe Mark, C at Alexandria, with which yprus was closely connected H G o f as a good man full of the oly host and faith , whose o f of surname Barnabas, son exhortation (conferred on o f him by the apostles) , marked him out as a man great persuasive influence — in all these respects this C hurch leader was well fitted to be the writer of a “ word of 22 — in exhortation (xiii . ) the Greek language and after 1 5 0 TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS the Alexandrian mode of thought— to the wavering and H 36 3 2 . 7 . 26 7 . 1 9 distracted ebrews (Acts iv , ix , ; xi 30 1 ; xiii . ; xv .

2 . The R d . ea ers To the Hebrews . We have no reason to doubt that this part of the superscri ption o f which probably formed the whole the original , and is — o f immemorial antiquity gives a correct indication of the readers for whom the epistle was intended . The whole tenor of the epistle implies that it was written for

Jewish C hristians . But various allusions show that it H C was not intended merely for ebrew hristians in general ,

d ﬁn i o mm uni 1 1 1 2 9 e t c t . . 10 but for some e y (v , vi , ;

32 - 3 4 . 1 1 9 o H w . 7 f x ; xiii , , , Which the ebre com f muni ies, in particular, is addressed has been much E R d. dispute Alexandria, Antioch , phesus, ome, have S f all been suggested . omething may be said for each o 1 h them , especially Antioch ; but from the way in whic the Gentiles are entirely ignored in the epistle— the “ ” word people , which frequently occurs, being always used to designate the Jews - it would seem most probable that the letter was intended for Christians in Jerusalem o r in some o ther part of Palestine . It was only in Palestine that Churches were to be found entirely com posed o f Jewish C hristians ; and the troubles that over~ took these congregations soon afterwards in connection with the destruction of Jer usalem would go far to account for the ignorance and uncertainty o f the early C hurch to the authorship and the original destination of this — fﬁ epistle an oblivion that is otherwise di cult to explain . P o Moreover, it was in alestine that the temptati ns to w r so relapse into Judaism , against hich the w iter is

x to r . an ious gua d his readers, were most formidable The

1 “ Ye e not et re ed n The n ua e o f . 4 o e er u o la g g xii , h w v , hav y sist t ” oo d co u d rd e een ddre ed to C r n Rome er bl , l ha ly hav b a ss h istia s at aft

64 A D . .

1 52 TH E N EW TESTAM ENT AND ITS WRITERS

time in the epistle . That it was written before the Fall of Jerusalem is evident not only from the allusions to

o n 2 3 . the sacriﬁcial system as still going (x , , etc ) and “ “ to the o ld covenant as beco ming old and nigh unto ” v vanishing away ( iii . but still more perhaps from the absence o f any allusion to the destruction o f the

Temple . That event, if it had already occurred , would have rendered superﬂuous any other proof o f the tran s ito ry and imperfect nature o f the Old Testament

dispensation . — I 4 . Charact er and C ontent s n many respects this book has more of the character of a treatise than of a C letter . Its great theme is the superiority of hristianity o to Judaism . This superiority it pr ves not so much — by minimising the o ld covenant which Paul had been obliged to do in vindicating the freedom of his Gentile — converts as by magnifying the new in the sense of its l being a fulﬁlment of the o d.

The epistle may be divided into two parts, the ﬁrst mainly o f an argumentative o r expository character — x. (i. the second chieﬂy hortatory and practical 1 9 (x . ( 1 ) In the former the writer seeks to establish the C D supremacy of C hrist and o f the hristian ispensation .

1 - 3 After the opening statement (i . ) as to the divine re velation being completed and concentrated in the “ So n to His to , he proceeds show superiority the

Law to angels, through whom the was believed have

- i. to been given ( ii), Moses and to Joshua But his main efforts are directed to proving Christ’s superiority and that of H is religion to the sacerdotal

- C f v . . o . system the Jews In vii he shows that hrist, while possessing in common with Aaron all the quali

ﬁ ations r of c of a t ue priest, belongs to a higher order

z priesthood , represented not by Aaron but by Melchi edek . H EBREWS 1 53

In the story of the meeting o f Melchizedek with Abraham ’ 1 8 - 20 and P en . (G . xiv ) in the salmist s prophetic allusion 4 h Ps ex. to the former . ﬁnds many reasons of an ( ) e. He allegorical nature to justify this view . represents the Head o f the C hristian C hurch as the possessor o f an unchangeable priesthood, secured by the divine oath n t — o n ot transitory, but permanen exercised not earth but in heaven — constituted not after the law of a carnal ”

of . commandment, but after the power an endless life — 1 x. 8 In viii . , a similar superiority is proved to belong to C D o n the hristian ispensation, with its law written the f ” heart, and its sacriﬁce of ered once for all in a taber ” naele no t C made with hands, whereby hrist hath through ” his o wn blood obtained eternal redemption . (2) In the cou rse o f the argument occasional exhorta

- - 3 1 4 . 1 tions and warnings are introduced (ii . iii 7 ; iv .

- 2— 1 1 . 1 1 6 v . vi But the practical application is l 9— mainly reserved for the concluding chapters, x . xiii . After exhorting his readers to avail themselves of the ” new and living way which has been thus consecrated “ for them into the holy place, and warning them o f against the terrible consequences apostasy, be com forts their hearts with the assurance that though they b e u may disowned by the sacerdotal leaders at Jer salem, they are in the true line o f fellowship with the saints o f old and holy men , whose devotion had been shown , not by the observance of an outward ceremonial , but by faith in the unseen In the next chapter, after exhorting them to patience under their trials through the sustaining G ’ power of od s fatherly love, he introduces a striking contrast between the terrors of Sinai and the attractive

o f " . glories Mount ion In the last chapter (xiii . ) he o f gives a number salutary counsels and admonitions, in the course o f which he calls upon his readers to go forth “ unto Jesus without the camp, bearing his reproach, 1 54 THE NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

“ as Jesus Himself suffered without the gate . H e ex horts them to offer the sa criﬁces of praise and well - doing

o f C r which are required the h istian , and bids them render obedience to their ecclesiastical superiors . The epistle concludes with a request for their prayers o n behalf of “ the writer, that he may be restored to (them) the ” fe w sooner, followed by a beautiful benediction , and a last words o f personal explanation an d greeting .

1 56 TH E NEW TE STAM ENT AND ITS WRITERS

D r C o f L 364 D o f A . ec ees of the ouncil aodicea, . , and

C 397 o f arthage, while a number other books which , although not in the New Testament, had been w read in church along with them ere ﬁnally disallowed . With regard to the Epistle o f James in particular the rarity o f allusions to it in the early Christian writers 1 may be accounte d for by its circulation being conﬁned to w C Je ish hristians, as well as by the narrow sphere of labour in which the writer himself moved , his life apparently having been entirely spent in Jerusalem . The internal evidence o f the book is strongly in its no w favour, and it is generally admitted to be a genuine “ ’ ” L Gal. o f . work James, the ord s brother ( i who presided for many years over the C hurch at Jerusalem . ’ “ l o f ( ) The writer s modest designation himself James,

God o f L C a servant of and the ord Jesus hrist, is against 2 the idea of forgery . ( ) The epistle was evidently 2 n o f written for Jewish C hristians by o e themselves . It “ ” 2 1 speaks of Abraham as our father (ii . ) it calls the ’ h “ 2 c of . readers pla e wors ip your synagogue (ii , “ ” it calls God the Lord of Sabaoth ( v . it takes for granted an acquaintance with Old Testament characters 5 1 0 1 2 . 7 (ii . ; v , ) it alludes to Jewish forms of oath ” 8 1 1 2 to . 1 ( v . ) it refers the law as still binding ( ii 1 1 of iv . ) and it contains no allusions to those sins the ﬂesh which ﬁgure so prominently in epistles designed for 3 of Gentile readers . ( ) It bears traces having been

1 The earliest expres s quotation from this epistle is found in the en but the n ua e o f Clemen of Rome and writings of Orig ; la g g t , still r ear o f H erm ou d e d us to e e e no n to mo e cl ly as, w l l a b li v that it was k w r l more n c n the c has ce in th ese write s . Sti l sig iﬁ a t is fa t that it a pla the ancient Syriac Version (the Pes chito ). 2 ou r en in co m r e ure Gree o n ma b e Al th gh w itt pa ativ ly p k ( wi g, it y , to our epistle being the translation o f an Aramaic original by a com r c o r c n u n der the d rec on o f me its er r pe tent G eek s h la a ti g i ti Ja s), lit a y o e is e en H e re rem nd n us of the Boo character as a wh l ss tially b w, i i g k of Pro verbs and other Jewish writings . JAM ES 1 5 7

— written by a n ative o f Palestine in its allusions tr the ” “ 6 . scorching wind ( i the sea ( i . ; iii sweet water and bitter (the latter referring to the brackish 1 1 1 2 o . springs of the c untry, iii , ) the vine, olive, and ” 4 ﬁg (iii . the early and latter rain (v . ( ) ’ u C It shows a familiar acq aintance with hrist s teaching, although its language is not such as to betray an imita 1 5 o f tion o f our Gospels . ( ) It reﬂects a state Jewish society — the rich Oppressing the poor— which is described by Josephus and other Jewish writers as prevailing in o f o ur L the period succeeding the death ord, but which in a great manner ceased to exist after the rebellion that f terminated in the destruction o Jerusalem . With regard to the author’s personal history the following points may be noted H e and his brothers 5 5 . 3 S . xn i . Joses , imon , and Jude (Matt Mark vi ) were of either the children Joseph and Mary, and younger o f o ur L of brothers ord , or else they were the children

Joseph by a former marriage . The latter supposition seems the more probable, both because it is in harmony with the earliest traditions of antiquity, and because it helps to explain the attitude of James and his brothers 4 towards Jesus du ring His lifetime (Matt . xii . 6 and John 3 vii . and the committal of Mary to the keeping, not o f her stepsons, but of the Apostle John (John xix . ’ We ﬁnd that at an advanced period in our Lord s ministry His Him brethren did not believe in (John vii . but immediately after the Ascension they are associated with the disciples in the upper room (Acts i .

h s According to a tradition , whic we have no rea on to disbelieve, their conversion was due to the appearance of

L 1 C r o . the risen ord to James, which is mentioned xv . 7 .

1 or. . 5 6 and 3 rk . 2 . 2 and o n i , Ma xi ; i 5 J h xiii . 1 7 and 2 Lu e . 0 . 9 and Lu e 2 5 . 1 0 and . . . 1 2 k vi iv k vi iv Matt xxiii v. 1 2 an d . . 3 Matt v 7 . 1 58 TH E NEW TE STAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

Among the C hristians at Jerusalem James soon took a prominent place, being , indeed, the recognised head of C o f the hurch there after the death James, the brother of 4 4 f John ( and the dispersion o the other apostles . This commanding position he owed partly to the special

o wn relation in which he stood to Jesus, and partly to his

o f high character, which procured for him the name the “ J us t (o r Righteous ) and Golias ( the bulwark of the

H e z is said to have been a Na arite, and so much given to prayer in the Temple that his knees had f H e e grown hard like those o a camel . was ssentially a

H w o f H ebre the ebrews, who clung to the law and the G prophets, and valued the ospel as their fulﬁlment . H ence his name was sometimes used by the J udais ing 2 f P Gal . 1 . 2 o . pa rty in opposition to aul ( . ii Acts xv 4) l as indeed it continued to be long after his death although he himself recognised Paul as the apostle of the G o n entiles, and did not insist a full observance of the

l - Ga . 9 1 9 2 1 2 5 G . . law by entile converts ( ii Acts xv , ,

H e of m r — died a death arty dom, stoned by the Jews as — Josephus and H eges ippu s relate shortly before the o f his destruction Jerusalem , for testimony to Jesus as the Messiah . To of Th Readers . 2 . e the twelve tribes which are ” the Dispersion (i . In view of the Jewish traits in the epistle, which have been already pointed out, and having regard to the migrato ry habits of the readers

to ( iv . there is no reason take these Opening words in D any other than a literal sense . Jews of the ispersion

o w were to be found in alm st every part of the orld , as appears from the narrative o f the events which took place o n the ﬁrst Christian Pentecost (Acts ii . The expression there used to describe the pilgrims who came “ a up to Jerus lem , devout men from every nation under

1 - ine H omilies co niti In the ( so called) Clemen t and Re g ons .

1 60 TH E N E W TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

On w m the hole , considering the arked absence from o f C the epistle anything like developed hristian doctrine, the continued expectation which it exhibits of C hrist’s o u he speedy coming t j dge the world ( v . and t applica tion of the term Synagogue to an assembly o f Christian worshippers (ii . we are justiﬁed in assigning to the

— 4 4 - 4 9 A D epistle a very early date say . . If this sup b e r position co rect, we have here the oldest book of the

New Testament . hara t er and C on nt s — 4 . C c te This epistle is less doctrinal o r theological than any other in the New

Testament . It partakes largely of the ethical character o f S 0 11 the ermon the Mount, which it resembles, not only in of its general tone and sentiment, but in many its 1 expressions . Its tone is eminently practical , the object o f to e C n r oralit the writer being inculcat hristian/ n y as

v e. . 1 4 essential to sal ation ( 9 . ii But it gives a promi

e nent place to faith ( .g . i . and includes e a u o f in its good w rks the c ref l ruling the tong ue ( iii . 2‘ l It also dwells much o n the wi clo rii which should sd w '

. i ii . characterise the religious man ( e 9 . 1 3 and refers — in deta il to many other forms of duty Christian practice being to the write r the highest form o f outward worship T (1. M Of the epistle is sententious and forcible, passing swiftly, and sometimes without any m o ne to apparent logical connection , fro topic another, and it has about it not a little o f the vehemence and o ld fervour of the prophets . James does not hesitate to denounce in very strong and plain terms, which savour,

1 - 4 and . . 48 . 5 and f 1. 2 and . . 1 0 1 2 . . O . Matt v ; i Matt v i Matt - n d 3 and 1 4 1 5 1 2 . 20 a . . 2 2 ii. 1 . . ii . 1 4 vn . 7 ; i Matt v ; Matt vi , ;

- an t . 2 4 1 0 and . d . vn . 2 1 2 3 . 4 d . . . 3 4 an Matt ; iv Mat vi iv Matt v ,

- 1 1 and . . 1 5 . 2 an d . . 1 9 v . 1 0 and . . 1 2 iv . Matt vii v Matt vi Matt v

and . 34 3 7 . 1 2 . v. Matt v 3 “ H ence Jam es has been called the Apostle of Wisdom an d the “ des ignation given to him in the Greek liturgy is that of James the Wise JAMES 1 61

o f of 1 in some respects, the language Amos, the greed and o f cruelty of the rich , the servility the poor, and the

- general vanity, strife, hypocrisy, and worldly mindedness which were characteristic Of the Jews at this period o f C their history, and had begun to infect the hristians in

their midst . H e o n Of insists character as the test true religion, and demands that a man shall show the reality o f his faith by

his life and conduct . In his protests against an empty o f of profession religion, he is led into the use language L which has sometimes been supposed (by uther, for example) to be irreconcilably at variance with the teach P 2 ing Of aul . But in reality there is no such inconsistency w bet een them . The good works which James contends for are alto gether different from the ritualistic Observances which Paul refused to acknowledge as necessary for salvation ; the justiﬁcation he has in view in this epistle is n o t the initial admission into the Divine favour which Paul ’s G ’ Gentile converts needed, but the continuance Of od s people in a state o f grace to which they are already called ; while the faith which he depreciates is not that personal union with the Lord Jesus Christ which Paul

all- for C declared to be important the hristian, but mere s uch of intellectual belief, as the acceptance the mono 1 9 theistic doctrine (ii . ) that lay at the foundation of the

on R 1 - 2 0 e . 4 Jewish faith . N can read omans ii 7 without seeing that Paul would have concurred most heartily in all that this epistle says about the necessity for carryin g religion into practice .

1 - 1 3 an d Am o 1 0 . 5 and Cf. . . 1 2 i . 5 Am o 1 6 . iv , v , s v ii , ; v s vi . 2 I m a e een the n u g e o f me 1 0 ou t y hav b la g a Ja s ii . that gave col r to

he m re re en on re erred to in c . 2 4 t is p s tati s f A ts xv . C H A P T E R Xxl

“ TH E FIRST E PISTLE GENERAL OF PETE R

Authorshi — v 1 . p There is abundant evidence to pro e that this epistle was written by the apostle whose name H o o f it bears . ardly any b ok the New Testament is better supported by external evidence ( extending as far back as the writings o f Polycarp in the early part of the of second century), while internally it bears in many its ’ o f P mi of features the stamp eter s nd, and the traces his t to G experience, as these are represen ed us in the ospels and in the Book o f Acts . From these sources we learn that the apostle was “ ” a S o f originally c lled imon , the son John , and that he was a fisherman of Bethsaida before he attached him w self to Jesus . With his brother Andre , who brought o f him to Jesus, he was a disciple John the Baptist before Hi s finding the Messiah . At very first interview with the new disciple, Jesus discerned his great capacity for His rendering service to cause, and gave him a prophetic token o f the part he was to play in the early history of His Church by conferring o n him the new name of G Peter o r C ep has (in reek , , meaning rock stone) , (John 4 0 of i . The significance the name was more fully ’ unfolded at a later time o n the occasion o f Peter s great 1 3 confession o f Jesus as the Christ (Matt . xvi .

1 64 THE NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

round his imprisonment, death, and burial . The lack o f evidence for these need not prevent us from acqui escing in the general belief of the early Church that it was at Rome Peter suffered the death by martyrdom L which had been predicted by his ord . This is contra

of Church dicted by no other ancient tradition the , and m of 1 6 we have some conﬁr ation it in this epistle (see p . 7 In illustration Of the remark already made as to the ’ harmony o f this epistle with Peter s experience and 1 character, we may note the following points . ( ) The “ writer claims to have been a witness Of the sufferings

o f C . hrist ( v and retains a vivid impression of them , ’ C 2 - 2 as shown in his description Of hrist s patience (ii . 0 4) to 2 and the frequency Of his allusions the subject . ( ) ’ He to C re re gives prominence hrist s resurrection , and p of 3 4 2 1 sents it as the source a new and living hope (i . , , 20 P ’ c iii . , which had been precisely eter s experien e . ’ ( 3) H e dwells upon the pastoral aspect of Christ s 2 5 2 4 ministry ( ii . v . ) as if under an abiding sense of the responsibility laid upon him by his Master’s threefold of His 4 charge to act the part a shepherd to ﬂock . ( ) ’ H e o n P re enlarges the idea embodied in eter s name, “ presenting the C hurch as a Spiritual house composed o f C H living stones, with hrist imself as the chief corner

4 - 8 - an to had stone (ii . ) idea which he already given to S 1 1 expression in his address the anhedrim (Acts iv . , after the example of his Lord - beth quoting from the 5 i . H s Old Testament (Matt xxi. ( ) injunction to “ ” o f his readers, all you gird yourselves with humility “ ’ ” on (literally, put humility like a slave s apron, v . ’ soun ds like a reminiscence of the Saviour s action which so astonished Peter when “ he took a towel and girded ” ’ i to His h mself in order wash disciples feet, saying, when “ H e had ﬁnished, I have given you an example that ye ” also should do as I have done to you (John xiii . 2 1 PETER 1 6 5

“ 1 7 o n ( 6) His language in i . ( And if ye call him as ”

F o f . ather, who without respect persons, etc ) bears a ’ “ P C a Of strong resemblance to eter s words at esarea, a

God o f . truth I perceive that is no respecter persons, etc 1 3 1 6 “ 7 . (Acts x . ( ) In ii , Be subject to every L ’ ” ordinance of man for the ord s sake as free, we have probably the reproduction Of the lesson taught to Peter by his Lord with regard to the payment o f the 2 4 x n . tribute money (Matt . v

- In the last mentioned passage, as in many others, we can discern traces of the same graphic and pictorial style as we have seen to be characteristic o f the Gospel of

Mark, which , there is reason to believe, is largely a record ’ “ P . S of eter s preaching uch are the expressions, not ” r using your freedom fo a cloke Of wickedness (ii . the word translated “ cloke ” being peculiar to Peter “ veil coverin (only used here), and meaning a or g ; ye ” of 11 ho uld put to silence the ignorance foolish men ( . “ ” the word rendered put to silence meaning, in a literal

muzzle do sense, to ( as a g) , and being only applied else where in the New Testament to the subduing of an of — unclean spirit, and the stilling the raging sea both in 2 5 3 “ of . 9 the Gospel Mark ( i . iv ) leaving you an ” example that ye should follow his steps (ii . the “ ” literal meaning of the word translated example being the cop y- head set before a scholar for his patient and “ persevering imitation ; your adversary the devil , as a roa rin lion g , walketh about seeking whom he maydevour

n of . (v . Aki to the pictorial style the epistle is the “ e . wealth Of epithets by which it is distinguished, g . u ndeﬁled an inheritance incorruptible, and , and that f . C . . 7 1 9 . 9 . fadeth not away (i i , ii , etc 1 2 P It appears from v . that in writing this epistle eter ” S a o ur had the assistance Of ilv nus, faithful brother, as to his amanuensis, who is, no doubt, be identiﬁed with 1 66 THE NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

“ S 2 2 32 4 0 the ilas mentioned in Acts xv . , , , and the S f 1 1 2 . 1 2 o C o r. . 1 9 ilvanus Thess i Thess . i . i . he 2 . The Readers . To t elect who are sojourners of D P G C the ispersion in ontus, alatia, appadocia, Asia, and ” o f Bithynia . The meaning this address has been much

’ disputed . By some it has been taken in a literal sense as denoting the C hristian Jews Of the Dispersion residing in f the various parts o Asia Minor that are here speciﬁed . But this is inconsistent with the language used by the

1 4 . 9 1 to . 0 apostle his readers in i ; ii , (where he quotes the sa me passage from H osea that Paulappliestothecalling 25 R m . . f o . 6 3 o the Gentiles in ix ) iii iv . All these passages would lead us to suppose that the d G rea ers Of the epistle were largely entiles, as we know the members Of the C hurches in Asia Minor for the most 1 part were . “ The words sojourners o f the Dispersion are prob ably to be interpreted in a spiritual sense with reference ’ to C C o n the heavenly anaan , from which hrist s followers a C e rth may be regarded as temporary exiles, the hurches to which they belong being scattered branches Of a com mo nwealth that has its home and its metropolis in heaven . This interpretation is justiﬁed by the whole tone Of the S epistle, which gives a piritual meaning to the blessings 2 Of the Old C ovenant . It accords in particular with “ 1 1 o u ii . , Beloved , I beseech y as sojourners and pilgrims, hl ” to a ﬂes . abst in from y lusts, which war against the soul 3 Dat e and Place of C om osition — . p The only thing

1 n rdin the C urc in Pon u s e c 11 9 For in formatio rega g h h t s e A ts . ;

- 2 in G . 87 94 in C do c c . 9 in xviii . ; alatia, pp ; appa ia, A ts ii ; Asia,

- - 24 26 1 35 E e n and C o o n . T e e Acts xviii. ; xx . 7 ph sia s l ssia s h s e ed he Go e rom P u and his oc e C hurches had r ceiv t sp l f a l ass iat s . ’

e imon in 1 2 . H en ce the valu e Of Peter s t st y v . 2 In acco rdance with this is the vi ew whi ch regards Paul as the n e r n me the o e e apo stle of Ge til Ch istia ity, Ja s as ap stl Of J wish ni Pe er o d n an n ermed e o on e een the Christia ty, t as h l i g i t iat p siti b tw two and Ohn the o e un er a Chr s n . , J as ap stl Of iv s l i tia ity

1 6 3 THE NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

— 4 . Charact er and Contents This epistle breathes the spirit o f practical earnestness so characteristic o f its “ ” author . The Greek word to do good occurs no less f than nine times in the course o the ﬁve chapters . There is 11 0 want o f allusion to Christian privilege and C hristian doctrine ; but it is always for a practical purpose, as Of furnishing motives for C hristian obedience . this we have an illustration in the frequent use o f the words ” “ ” “ wherefore, therefore, because, etc . , by way of

1 3 2 2 . . 1 6 1 enforcing practical applications (i , , ; ii , The chief duty which the writer wishes to inculcate is

- 2 1 3- f 6 1 9 1 . 1 8 o . 7 . that patience under trial (i , ii iii 1 2 f iv . In many cases the suf ering arose from perse

— - cu tio n proceeding from suspicion and ill will on the part

- 1 1 o f C o f 1 . 8 1 9 the non hristian members the community ( , ; o f C iii . The very name hristian was becoming a f term o reproach (iv . and even worse trials were in 2 fo r . 1 store them (iv , For the endurance of all such unmerited sufferings the apostle points them to the example o f the Saviour ( whose sufferings are referred to in every chapter) , at the same time bidding them take ca re that they do not bring trouble on themselves by their unworthy conduct . Their trials, he reminds them, 6 are only for a time (i . iv . 7 v . and will receive ’ ab undant compensation at the revelation Of C hrist s glory 1 3 1 4 f . 1 0 C . 7 . (i iv , v ) The suf erings of hrist and the glories that should follow are indeed the two poles w around hich the whole argument of the epistle turns, f resulting in a beautiful blending o patience and hope . “ ” 1 H ence Peter has been styled the Apostle Of Hope . Along with the calls to patience there are mingled

z 1 3- 1 various other admonitions addressed to citi ens, ii . 7

- - 1 8 20 1 . . 6 . 7 servants, ii wives, iii husbands, iii elders

1 co m ared ohn the o e o e P u the o e of As p with J ap stl Of l v , a l ap stl m h and e t e o e of or s . faith, Ja s ap stl w k 1 PETER 1 69

1 4 C . Of the hurch , v and the congregation generally ,

5 - 1 1 with reference to various duties, iv . , etc . It is

o f worthy of note, that although this epistle has so little o f a speculative character, it has been the means reveal ing two interesting truths, which would not have been 1 2 1 . 8 otherwise known to us (i , last clause iii . It may also be said to contai n a practical refutation of the R P ’ s C omish theory as to eter s juri diction in the hurch . So far from making any claim to authority or pre i on em nence, the writer expressly puts himself a level h wit the other presbyters, and deprecates anything like a o f f 1 spirit lordship in the exercise o their ministry (v . ” ” “ C ” The names priest, bishop, hurch, are never even 1 mentioned by him .

1 “ E ce B o in 11 2 5 ere o e er C r Him x pt ish p . , wh , h w v , it is h ist self who is so designated. C H A PT E R XXII

1 2 PE TE R~ J UDE

“ TH E SEC OND E PISTLE GE NE RAL OF PE TE R

1 Authorshi — Of e . p . The genuineness this epistl has been more questioned than that of any other book in the N ew Testament ? The external evidence for it is comparatively meagre . We seem to hear echoes Of its language in some o f - the earliest post apostolic works, but the ﬁrst writer to make express and unmistakable mention of it is Origen ( 2 30 and he does so in such a manner as to show that he has doubts about its genuineness . A century later it is class ed by Eusebius among the disputed books of the

New Testament . The diffi culty of accepting it as a genuine writing of P eter has chieﬂy arisen, both in ancient and in modern f times, from its dif ering so greatly in tone and substance from the ﬁrst epistle, written , as we have seen , near the P ’ close of eter s life . There is scarcely any reference in

1 On the conn ec on e een e e two e e s ee . 1 76 . ti b tw th s pistl s , p 2 The ue on enu n ene re c rr e c n on c q sti Of g i ss ally a i s with it that Of a i ity, as the epistle is written through ou t in the n ame and with the au th ority of the o e Pe er and o u d o e e to ce in the N ew Ap stl t , w l l s its titl a pla r Pro e or R m T estament if it cou ld b e pro ved to b e a fo gery . f ss a say “ ou d r u e to d c e who u o f the r and ord w l att ib t it a is ipl , was f ll spi it w s o f e c er an d who e e ed s o oro u he i n the his t a h , b li v th ghly that was g vi g ”

e of his e ac er he r u ed to e c er. vi ws t h , that att ib t it that t a h

1 72 THE NEW TESTAM ENT AND ITS WRITERS

It has also been found that this epistle, like the ﬁrst, is distinguished by the use of rare words, Of a striking P b ut and pictorial character, after the manner of eter, “

: e. not borrowed from the first g . whose sentence now ” “ tur in f fro m o f old lingereth no t (ii . n g the cities O “ S in t ashe en ticin n u odom and Gomorrah o s (ii . g ” “ ” en tice stedfast souls, they in the lusts of the flesh 1 4 “ ” . 1 8 (ii , ) (the word translated entice meaning liter to ta ke with a bait ally , being such a word as a fisherman “ would naturally use) which the ignorant and un stedfast wres t as 1 6 , they do also the other scriptures (iii . ) “ G to ut on the rack the reek word for wrest meaning p , i for o f l ke a criminal , the purpose extorting a desired confession . It is worthy of remark as a note of genuineness that although the writer was evidently acquainted with the l first epistle (iii . ) he does not copy its designation Of u the apostle, as a forger might s rely have been expected to do, nor does he attach the same address to the epistle, l 1 . P no r et . . conclude with the same doxology (i , i S imilarly, when he mentions the words spoken by the n voice from heaven at the Transfiguratio , he does not give them exactly as they are reported in the Gospels ; m d and , in im e iate connection with the Transfiguration , “ ” o f he makes use two words, namely tabernacle and ” P ’ decease, that would naturally be associated in eter s

1 4 - . 1 8 mind with the memory Of that great incident (i , f L . 31 o . uke ix In his use of the expression in the o ur L C same passage, even as ord Jesus hrist signiﬁed ” ’ o to our L unt me, we may trace an allusion ord s prophecy ’ o f P . 1 8 eter s death in JOhn xxi ,

1 “ In the recurrence the ord under r e of Of w stablish, a va i ty orm we e ro an u r o n o f the me re ro ec e f s, hav p bably ill st ati sa t sp tiv endenc c ma b e d cern ed o in the r e e - the re er t y, whi h y is als ﬁ st pistl , f ’ “ ence in hi c s e e n to Lord n unc on en once ou , t s a , b i g his s i j ti wh th ”

a urned in i re ren . h st t aga , stabl sh thy b th 2 PETER 1 7 8

The Readers — 2 . This epistle bears to be addressed to the same readers as the ﬁrst (see p .

D t e and Pla e of C om n . 3. a c positio There is a s trong probability that it was written before the de O struction of Jerusalem . therwise such an impressive instance of divine judgment could scarcely have been left unnoticed in alluding to the retributive justice of

God. At the same time the errors and dangers described in this epistle, which bear a strong resemblance, in some to respects, to those referred in the pastoral epistles 8 1 5 2 1 2 . 1 . 2 20 . 1 . 1 . . ( Tim iv , ; vi , , ; Tim ii ; iii prove that it could not have been written much sooner than P ’ A . D 70 . The allusion to aul s epistles as known to the

. 1 5 1 6 readers (iii , , ) leads to the same conclusion, as “ does also the frequency of the expression pu t in remem ” 1 1 2 1 3 1 5 1 brance and kindred words ( . , , iii . , which indicate an advanced period in the apostolic age, as well as in the life Of Peter— assuming that he was the writer . L ike the ﬁrst epistle, this was probably written from ’ Rome ; but the use of the apostle s Hebrew name of

S or S . of ymeon , imon ( i as well as the connection

of a this epistle with that Jude, would seem to indicate P of alestinian inﬂuence some sort, possibly in the person ’ of Peter s amanuensis or secretary . Chara t r and C n nts — 4 . c e o te This epistle, unlike the

of . ﬁrst, is full denunciation and warning It was designed to o n put its readers their guard against false teachers, “ who were enticing unsteadfast souls, promising them liberty while they themselves are bondservants of corrup ” tion . In opposition to their immoral doctrines it in culcates a steady and persevering endeavour after holiness as the only way to advance in true knowledge and secure an entrance into the eternal kingdom o f our Lord and 1 74 TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

S C . to aviour Jesus hrist In particular, the writer seeks confute the arguments and counteract the inﬂuence of f S C certain scof ers who made light Of the econd oming, u as if it were a vain del sion , and appealed to the con

a m o f r st ey Nature as a war ant for their unbelief . The delay Of the divine judgment the writer attributes to the L fact that one day is with the ord as a thousand years, ” as and a thousand years one day, alleging the delay ’ - ff to be a proof o f God s mercy and long su ering . The destruction of the world in the days of Noah is cited as an act Of divine judgment analogous to that which is to

l o f take p ace at the end the world, when the destroying element, however, shall be not water but ﬁre . From the “ dread catastrophe there shall arise new heavens and a ” n ew a h e rth wherein dwellet righteousness, for which C hristians ought to be preparing ; and the epistle con cludes a much in the same way as it commenced, with “ call to grow in the grace and knowledge of o ur Lord ” an d S aviour Jesus Christ . The intrinsic worth of the epistle is well expressed by “ C e S of C alvin when he says, the maj sty of the pirit hrist

r h exhibits itself in eve y part o ft e epistle .

“ TH E GE NE RAL E PISTLE OF JUDE

“ Authorshi — of C 1 . p Judas, a servant Jesus hrist, and bro ther of James . It may be regarded as certain that the James whom the writer here claims as his — brother was the well known head o f the C hurch at ’ o ne o u r L Of Jerusalem, of ord s brethren , and the writer 5 5 the epistle that bears his name ( cf . Matt . xiii . ; Mark

r vi . Jude is the efore not to be identiﬁed with any

Of the apostles of the same name mentioned in the Gospels . H ad he been an apostle he would doubtless have claimed

1 76 THE NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

to a C but not ny particular hurch, as it contains no 1 special salutations or messages . f — 3. Dat e an d Place O Comp osition Regarding the

place of writing we have no direct information , but all the circumstances point to Palestine as the source Of the

epistle . From the absence of any allusion to the destruo tion of Jerusalem we infer it was written prior to that 2 P event ; but here, as in eter, the evils with which the epistle deals preclude us from giving it a much earlier 65—68 D date . As an approximation we may name A. . d on ents — 4 . Chara ter an C c t This epistle, consisting

of a single chapter, bears a very striking likeness to the o f 2 P second chapter eter, so much so that we may conclude with conﬁdence that the on e was borrowed from the other . As this epistle has certain features of originality about it which the other lacks, we may infer

P . IS that St . eter and not Jude was the borrower It E quite possible, however, that the pistle Of Jude may — itself be the translation of an Aramaic original judging , ? for example, from its fondness for threefold expressions The epistle is remarkable for several allusions to matters o f ancient history that are not recorded in the 1 4 Old Testament . In ver . we have a quotation from an apocryphal book Of Enoch (of which several copies of an Ethiopic version were brought from Abyssinia by the 1 7 3 of G traveller Bruce in 7 , while a large part it in reek E 9 has been recently discovered in gypt) ; and ver . seems “ to have been derived from a book called The Assu mption ” of Moses, only a small part of which has been preserved

to us . These allusions are not more at variance with the doctrine of Inspiration than the quotations in the

1 n on c the r er i e ms e ud s the The des ig ati whi h w it g v s hi lf J a , — brother of J ames was well ﬁtted to command the attention o f Jewish co nverts owing to the deep reverence in which Jam es was held

by his coun trymen . 2 1 1 Cf. vv. 1 , 8, . JUD E 1 77

“ Old a of e Test ment from the Book Jasher, and oth r ’ “ or P such documents, aul s allusions to Jannes and ”

2 . a Jambres ( Tim iii . or his quot tions from heathen 2 P writers . In eter, however, these quotations almost a n e miss ion o f one disappear, and there is also or two L references to evitical uncleanness, as if the writer desired to adapt his epistle as far as possible for general use .

The epistle is full Of sharp and stern denunciation , of aimed at practical evils a most heinous character, committed by men who were “ turning the grace of our God o ur into lasciviousness, and denying only Master and L ” u C . ord , Jes s hrist These evils were founded upon a

r of C g oss abuse hristian liberty, and were somewhat similar to the terrible excesses which broke out among P R re the Anabaptists after the rotestant eformation , s ulting from the abuse of the doctrine o f Justiﬁcation C n by Faith, when professing hristians combi ed the guilt o f C K ain (bloodshed), of Balaam (seduction), and Of orah 1 1 o f (insubordination), ver . . In view the corruption both of faith and manners that was thus beginning to C infect the hurch , Jude exhorts his readers to contend earnestly fo r the faith which was once for all delivered ” G ’ unto the saints, and appeals to the past history of od s judgments for proof of the punishment in store for the ff t present o enders, whom he commends never heless to the of compassion and care their believing brethren . The epistle concludes with one of the most beautiful doxologies to be found in the New Testament . C H A PT E R XXIII

1 2 AN D 3 H N , , JO

TH E FIRST E PISTLE GE NE RAL OF JOH N

uthorshi — of 1 . A p This epistle was used by two the F o athers who had been disciples of the Ap stle John ,

v z P P . c d i . olycarp and apias It was re ognised and quote ’ as John s by Irenaeus who had been a disciple Of Poly Of carp , and it was evidently known by the writer the t L etter to D iogne ns . It is freely quoted by C lement of

Alexandria and Tertullian , is referred to in the Mura one of torian Fragment, and is the books contained in as h ld L the Syriac well as in t e o atin Version . Its inte rnal characte r is such as to conﬁrm us in the belief that it was written by the author of the fourth 1 Go . n spel Not only has it ma y verbal similarities, but it is dominated by the same C hristian idealism which refers all things in human life to the ultimate principles

Of light and darkness, truth and error, good and evil,

God . SO love and hatred, life and death, and the devil intimate is the co nnection between the two books that

1 f o n 1 1 4 . 2 o n 1 1 c . 1 . . 2 . . 3 o n . i , J h i , , xx 7 i , J h iii i , J h

2 4 . o n 2 1 4 o n . 5 6 . 5 . 1 2 1 1 vu 2 1 . . . x . i , J h xvi i , , J h i , iii , viii ; ii ,

o n . 35 . 1 4 o n . 2 4 . 9 o n . 1 4 . 1 6 . 1 4 J h xii ; iii , J h v ; iv , J h i , iii ; iv ,

n 4 2 6 o n . 34 . Joh iv. ; v. , J h xix

1 80 THE NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS W RITERS

C translation into the hristian life of those great truths,

God regarding the fellowship Of with man , that are found in the fourth Gospel in connection with the life and

C . G ministry of Jesus hrist That ospel , as we have seen , is doctrinal as well as historical , but its doctrines are ’ here applied to the lives Of C hrist s followers . The o f G epistle is thus in advance the ospel , being designed to lead Christians to a conscious realisation of the new — life to which they are called in fellowship with C hrist a life transcending and vanquishing that of the world (cf . 4 5 2 3 1 1 . 4 v . , , , , and i with John xx . Its thought springs mainly out of a twofold concep D “ ” i tion o f the ivine Nature as light ( . and as “ ” o f . 7 1 love (iv united by a bond righteousness ( 1 . 2 9— n o iv . There is laboured argument such as we ’ of P ﬁnd in some aul s epistles, but simply an appeal to ﬁrst principles that are to be seen with the spiritual e e y , n f ot to be proved by means o logic .

o Alth ugh lofty and spiritual , the teaching in the a epistle is at the s me time intensely practical . It was evidently intended to co unteract the growing tendency f to o . 6 magnify knowledge at the expense practice (i , 7

- - 1 n 6 1 0 . 3 6 . . 8 O e . in ii iii cf ii , form Of this cipient Gnosticism was associated with the name of C erinthu s who E , lived at phesus in the time Of the 1 in hu . C er t s apostle , like many others, denied the reality ’ o f C u m r hrist s h manity, aintaining, in pa ticular, that the Divine Being only entered into the man Jesus at his n f P Baptism and left him o the eve o his assion . H ence “ the emphatic statement of the apostle (v . This is he C that came by water and blood , even Jesus hrist ; not with the water only, but with the water and with the blood S His , implying that the aviour fulﬁlled divine mission in His death upon the cross as well as in His

1 C ed Docetce rom Greek ord mean n a aren t not re all f a w i g pp , al . 2 JOH N 1 81

baptism . Again and again , in other passages, the apostle insists on the reality o f the union between Jesus and the C an C hrist, as essential element of the hristian faith 1 3 5 5 f . 2 2 2 1 . 1 o . ( ii . ; iv . , , ; v , ; i

While it gives no quarter to evil and falsehood , the epistle overﬂows with exhortations to the love o f God

- 1 1 - 1 7 - 1 3 1 6 - 2 1 1 9 1 1 . 8 . . and man (ii . ; iii ; iv , ; v , ’ As we read the apostle s language here, we ﬁnd it easy of to believe the story told him by Jerome, that when he was too Old to preach he used to be carried to church , o f simply to repeat in the hearing the congregation , “ ” L o ne ittle children , love another . And when some “ o ne u w asked him, Master, why dost tho al ays speak 1 ” L ’ thus he answered , Because it is the ord s command and if only this be done, it is enough .

“ TH E SE C OND E PI STLE OF JOH N — Au h sh . 1 . t or ip The external evidence for the genuineness Of this epistle is not so convincing as in the case Of the one that we have just been considering but this is easily accounted for by its brevity and its being less suitable for public reading in church . At ’ the same time, it is expressly quoted (as John s) by r a C o f I en eus and lement Alexandria, and is mentioned in the Muratorian Fragment . It appears also to have been E acknowledged by usebius, although he placed it among “ the disputed books . With regard to internal evidence, L it has all the appearance of being genuine . ike the “ r thi d epistle it bears to be written by the elder, a designation which implies that the writer was a well C h ﬁtl known personage in the hurc , and which might be y 1 claimed by John as the last Of the apostles . But an

1 ’ “ - C f. Pe er use the e re on e o w e der as ed to t s Of xp ssi a f ll l , appli

m e 1 Pe er . and the n u e P end hi s lf ( t v la g ag Of apias ( App ix , p . TH E N EW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS imitator who wished to pass for John would have made his claim in more distinct terms and the contents of the epistle are such that no reasonable motive can be assigned

for forgery . The genuineness of this epistle derives considerable ﬁrst support also from its strong resemblance to the , 11 0 less than seven o f its thirteen verses having some 1 in thing parallel the other .

T . 2 . he Reader Unto the elect lady and her ” children . It is a question whether these words are to

be taken literally, or in a ﬁgurative sense as the designa n tion o f a C hurch and its members . O the whole the m w o f latter see s the more probable, in vie the expressions 4 5 10 3 n l 1 . S used in verses , , , , uch ﬁgurative la guage need not surprise us in the case of a writer so fond Of symbolism as the author o f the Apocalypse and the fourth Gospel ? But which Of the C hurches in Asia is thus

addressed we have no means of knowing . f m — I 3 . Date an d Place o C o p osition t was probably E — written from phesus, subsequently to the ﬁrst epistle . h te on — 4 . C arac r and C tents While the epistle con tains expressions Of warm affection for the members Of the C hurch in question (whom the writer appears to have to recently visited), its main Object is warn them against the insidious and corrupting inﬂuence of certain heretical teachers who were going about denying the reality of ’ “ ” n u C hrist s humanity (ver . 7) The elder urges an

compromising opposition to all such teachers, in terms that remind us o f the story told o f John by Iren aeus o n P the authority Of those who had received it from olycarp ,

1 1 and 1 r n 1 d o n 8 ver 4 . 2 ve . a d 1 . C f. ver 1 an 1 . . 5 . J h iii iv

- v r 6 an d 3 ver. an d . 1 3 ver. 9 and . 2 3 ver. 1 2 7 ; e . v . ; 7 iv ; ii ;

4 . and i. 2 So me think that a similar metaph or is to be found in the First e o f e r om r d on oc e in er e r Epistl P te (v . wh t a iti ass iat s his lat y a s o n with J h .

1 84 TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS is addressed as a faithful and liberal member of the C hurch (verses 1 — 3. D t and Pl e of C m os i n L a e ac o p it o ike the second, — this epistle was probably written from Ephesus su bse quently to the ﬁrst . — 4 . Chara er and C nt ents ct o This epistle, like the

o f C - second , gives us a momentary glimpse hurch life in o f Asia towards the close the ﬁrst century . While the t second con ains a warning against heresy, this relates f rather to the evil o schism . It shows us the practical difficulties which had to be encountered in the govern ai ment Of the Church . In G ns (the recipient of the letter) we have a sincere and charitable Christian whose inﬂuence and example the writer invokes in Opposition to the factions and into lerant conduct Of an ambitious D who ecclesiastic named iotrephes, had gone so far as to close his doors on “ the brethren ” who had come in the “ o f name the elder, apparently bearing a letter from — our 9 him perhaps second epistle (verses , The ad C aged he of the hurch feels that it will be necessary, to the next time he visits the district, hold a reckoning ff 1 with the O ender for his malice and presumption . Meanwhile he warns Gains against being led astray by the example o f Diotrephes and in pleasing contrast — with the latter he refers to one Demetrius apparently — “ the bearer of this letter who hath the witness of all ”

. a men, and of the truth itself Finally he pleads the s me excuse for his brevity as he does in the case o f the

viz. second epistle, that he hopes soon to visit his readers, “ ” when they shall speak face to face .

1 “ e c m con dence o n m o m Th al ﬁ Of St . J h see s t rest on hi self more

n on hi s o fi c o er. H is re ence nd c e u or tha f ial p w p s will vi i at his a th ity . he ro w of the C urc e n m r ed e r n n en T g th h h s is as plai ly a k as th i i depe d ce . The r c e in em ecome an ec of u n or m on ﬁ st pla th has b Obj t w thy a biti . T e are e and e r for the mo r n to m n n h y abl , as it app a s, st pa t willi g ai tai ” m s on r e c er e co . i si a y t a h s . (W st tt ) C H A PT E R XXIV

“ R VE L TI N F T H N TH E I INE TH E E A O O S . JO D V

Au h rshi — 1 . . t o p There is very strong external evidence n to prove that this book was written by the Apostle Joh . P assing over some earlier apparent witnesses, we ﬁnd unmistakable mention of it in the writings of Justin H e of Martyr. expressly refers to it as the work the dialo ue Tr ho apostle, in the g which he held with yp , an E unbelieving Jew, in the very city of phesus where John E lived, and within half a century after his death . qually of a clear and explicit is the testimony Iren eus, who, as n P we have see , was a disciple of olycarp, the disciple Of o ne a John . In passage Iren eus even gives as his author “ ity for preferring 666 to 61 6 as the number of the ” beast, in the disputed reading (xiii . the testimony f wh o o . those . had seen John face to face The book is twice mentioned in the C anon of the Muratorian Frag e ment, nce in such a way as to imply that it was publicly read in chu rch ; it was o ne o f the books on which of S a Melito, Bishop ardis, wrote a commentary ( bout D “ 1 7O A. . ) and it is expressly quoted as the Scrip ” ture in the letter sent by the persecuted Christians o f Vienne and Lyons to their brethren in Asia Minor ( 1 77 But soon after the middle o f the second century the 1 86 THE NEW TESTAM ENT AND ITS WRITERS

book began to be regarded with suspicion, owing to the use made of it by a heretical party called the Montanists, who indulged in extravagant notions regarding the ” ’ thousand years of C hrist s reign with H is saints which was to take place before the end of the world (xx ) . This feeling Of distrust was strengthened by Observing what a marked difference there was in the language and style of the Revelation as compared with the other works ascribed to John and a considerable amount of controversy took

o n ob ec place the subject . Ultimately, however, the j o b tions were overruled, and the bo k O tained general accepta nce in the C hurch . In modern times the controversy has been renewed ; to o f Old and objectors are still disposed insist, as , on the internal marks of a different authorship from that of the fourth Gospel ? In particular it is pointed o ut that Go e G R l whereas the spel is writt n in good reek, the eve a tion is full Of grammatical mistakes and eccentricities so that while there is scarcely anything in the former to G show that the writer was other than a reek , the latter would give us the impression of its having been written by a person who ﬁrst thought in Hebrew and had after wards tO turn his thoughts into a language with which he was imperfectly acquainted . TO meet this Objection the following considerations may be adduced ( l) The difference in the nature and contents of the o ne two books the being mainly narrative or colloquial , the other bein g formed o n the model of the Old Testa 2 ff o n ment prophets . ( ) The possible e ect the apostle ’ of many years residence in Ephesu s (if we accept the earlier date assigned to the Revelation) in the way of

r 3 improving his knowledge Of G eek . ( ) The unfavour

1 Tu n en c o o o e er en er dm Re e on the The bi g s h l, h w v , g ally a it v lati as

o r the o e and re ec the o ur Go e . w k Of ap stl , j t f th sp l

1 88 TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS from successive conﬂicts marked by apparent and tem orar G p y defeat In these conﬂicts the entiles , centred “ in Babylon , take the place held by the unbelieving “ ” Jews in the Gospel and the disciples of the earlier days “ ” C o r are represented by the hurch , the bride (of

C hrist) . R It has been objected that the evelation, unlike the o f other writings John , gives the name of its avowed

1 4 9 xxn . fi author (i . , , ; But this is suf ciently h o f accounted for by the prophetical c aracter the book . It was the practice o f the prophets o f the Old Testa of to ment, although not the historians, mention their

names in their writings . —I 2 . The Readers . t was evidently meant for the — “ Church at large represented by the seven C hurches 1 which are in Asia ( . — 9 3 Date and Pla e of Com os tion . . c p i From i we learn that the revelation was made to J Ohn when he “ was in the isle that is called Patmos (in the [Egean ” Sea ) fo r the word of God and the testimony of Jesus . 3 5 1 1 . 4 I 9 . From i . ; x ; xiv . ; xix . ; xxi , we should infer that it was committed to writing in the island f immediately after it was received . As to the date o ’ i P a the apostle s ban shment to atmos, Iren eus expressly mentions that the vision was seen almost within his own generation at the end o f the reign of Domitian (Emperor 8 1 - 96 There is nothing in any earlier writer to throw discredit on this statement ; and there are several things in the book itself which seem to point to a late

f e o o . . date composition , g the imp rtant and intimate relation in which John appears to stand to the principal C o f o f hurches Asia Minor, the signs marked spiritual

4 5 . I C 11 . declension in several of these hurches ( , iii , “ ’ the use Of the expression the Lord s day (i . ” “ Of instea d of the earlier ﬁrst day the week , and of the THE REVELATION OF ST. JOH N 1 8 9

1 9 . phrase synagogue o f Satan ( 1 . iii which would scarcely have been employed by a C hristian writer previous to the destruction of Jerusalem . At the same time there are some Observations by writers later than Irenaeus that favour an earlier date . Tertullian tells us that at Rome the Apostle John was Oil plunged in burning , without sustaining any injury, and that he was afterwards banished to an island . It is in connection with the martyrdom o f Peter and Paul m w that he akes the remark , hich suggests the close of ’ Nero s reign as the time referred to ; and accordingly we ﬁnd Jerome (about the end of the fourth century) ff making an explicit statement to that e ect . It is quite a possible Iren eus may have made a mistake, occasioned perhaps by the frequency Of banishment in the reign of Domitian and this is the View taken by some critics at

who can the present day, only account for the style and character of the book o n the supposition that it was G written a considerable time before the ospel . The key to the interpretation Of the book , they conceive, is to be of found in the identiﬁcation the reigning king in xvii . 1 0 E G with the mperor alba, the successor of Nero . The latter is regarded as the head of the beast referred to in 3 xiii . , the healing of its wound symbolising the reste ra of tion Nero, who was then supposed to be still alive and in hiding in the East . C onﬁrmation of this is found 8 1 1 “ ii. in xv , , and also in the symbolical number of ” “ the beast ( the number of a man Six hundred ” and sixty and six, xiii . which answers in Hebrew ” to “ C letters the name Neron aesar. But it would be more natural to reckon the number in Greek letters (as Irenaeus did) ; and in either case a correspondence to it can be made o ut in the case Of a great many other prominent names . This weakens very much the force “ o f the argument, for we cannot infer much from the 1 90 THE N EW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

fact that a key ﬁts the lock, if it is a lock in which ” 1 almost any key will turn .

4 . Chara t er and C onten R o r c ts . The evelation “ ” Ap ocalyp se (a Greek word meaning uncoverin g ) has o f many the characteristics o f the Book of Daniel . Both

1 “ Whatever interpretation we may give to the number of the ” e st ere ne w ro n con c on the eo r c d b a , th is a g wi g vi ti that th y whi h ates the c ompo sition Of the bo ok before the destru ction o f Jerusalem must be ndoned and the er ecu on re erred to not c aba , that p s ti f is that whi h o o ce Ro me in the re n ero b ut the uf er n n c ed on t k pla at ig Of N , s f i gs i fli t C r n a er d e in the ro nces e ec in nor h istia s at lat at , p vi , sp ially Asia Mi , n re u ed or the Em eror and Ro m I n u o o whe they f s to w ship p a . s pp rt f conc u o n the o o n con der on ma b e dduced 1 this l si f ll wi g si ati s y a . ( ) The abso lute and irreconc ilable Opposition between the Church and ” the Empire which distinguishes this book fro m all the oth er writings f the N ew e men e en the f em o T e o . 2 The de cr on sta t , v lat st th ( ) s ipti “ o f Ro me the re r o e u on m n w er as g at ha l t that sitt th p a y at s , with o m the n o f the e r co mm ed orn c on the o m n wh ki gs a th itt f i ati , . w a drun en the ood o f the n and the o o d o f he k with bl sai ts , with bl t ” m r r e u — c nd e n on in the c the a ty s Of J s s, whi h fi s its xpla ati fa t that or Ro m had read o e r the Em re and new the mos w ship Of a sp v pi , was t ” orm d e r l C ri n had o con end 3 The f i abl iva that h stia ity t t with . ( ) ‘ ‘ ’ re erence to Per mum as the ce ere n rone f ga pla wh Sata s th is , ere n d e e - c n een the r ce i n wh Sata w ll th that ity havi go b fi st pla Asia to o es e m e in onour the E m eror Au us teum and p ss s a t pl h Of p ( g ), n een the cene of Chr n m r rdom ren m n havi g b s a istia a ty , appa tly a y “ e r e ore the oc e r en e en in the d of y a s b f Ap alyps was w itt , v ays ” n m w tne m u one who ed m on o u A tipas y i ss , y faithf l , was kill a g y . ( 4 ) The nature Of the death suffered by the martyrs and I saw the o u o f em had een e e ded for the e mon of e u and s ls th that b b h a t sti y J s s , for the ord of God and uc as or ed not the e ne er w , s h w shipp b ast, ith m e and rece ed not the m r u o n e r ore e d and u on his i ag , iv a k p th i f h a p ” — th eir hand as beheading was a common form of punishment with m n r ro con u but not in us e Ro e dur n the ero c e ecu on . p s ls, at i g N i p s ti to the rec s e d e c ccord n to V e to b e As p i at whi h, a i g this i w, is ned to the com o on of the o o ere ro om for d fference as sig p siti b k , th is i f n on omm en r ue for the er e r of e n 5 - 80 o Opi i . M s a g s lat y a s V spasia ( 7 th n r r on c he e to cer n A D . c e on c coun e e e . ) hi fly a t Of i t p tati whi h giv s tai ’ a e re err n to the e ec on of the er eudo - ero p ssag s , as f i g xp tati lat ps N s h o f th P r ns r rom ere eem return with t e help e a thia . Apa t f this th s s to be no goo d reas on why we should not accept the statem ent o f Irenaeu re d re erred to the Re e on c me to o n in the s , al a y f , that v lati a J h c o n e r of o m i n o e n me r di on oc ed l si g y a s D it a , wh s a is t a ti ally ass iat with pers ecution o f the C hristian s ( of which we have s ome traces in the r n of on C u and ue o n u and who o o de in the w iti gs Di assi s S t i s) , t k light o e d to him em eror an d in the e of dominus ct dens h mag pai as p , titl m his redece or u which had already been clai ed by p ss Calig la .

1 92 TH E NEW TE STAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

D o f estruction Jerusalem , find themselves beset with insuperable difficulties when they come to deal with a of cert in portions the book , while in other passages their theory would seem to imply that some of the o f S predictions the eer were very soon falsified by events . This is a supposition which it is almost as difficult to reconcile with the high estimation in which the Apocalypse to C continued be held by the early hurch , as with its divine inspiration . The safest and probably the truest interpretation Of the book is to regard it as a symbolic representation Of great principles rather than as a collection of definite

. ediﬁ predictions In other words, it is intended for the ’ o C cation and comf rt of hrist s people, not to give detailed information regarding the future to those who are clever “ H enough to solve its enigmas . ere, if anywhere, faith are to and love the key knowledge, not knowledge the of key to faith and love . It is in the very spirit the

o r w o r book , not in a spirit hard narro unsympathetic, ‘ that it closes with the words the grace of the Lord h ’ ” 1 Jesus C rist be with the saints .

1 Dr n h f Re e on . . Milliga on t e Book o v lati APP E N D I X A

SUMMARY OF PATRIST IC LITE RATU RE

T H E ﬁ rst six o f the fo ll owing are usually call ed the Apostolic Fathers n of R m cco d n to an c an d Cleme t o e, a r i g an ient unani mo s r on on e of e r s s o s o f the Ro u t aditi , was the a lie t bi h p man rch m on the n u mero r n ha ee Chu . A g us w iti gs t t have b n s cr ed to him on o n e n e w re r e c a ib , ly is ga ded as genuin , whi h n as his 1 st E e to the C o r n n e er is kno w pistl i thia s . The l tt is e the o f Ro C rc n ot ho writt n in name the man hu h, wit ut a tone o f authority (altho ugh there is scarcely any more trace in it than in the N ew Testament of episcopal jurisdicti o n in “ ” “ ” m o rc c s s erm o an d es r a na hi al en e, the t s bish p pr byte n l e co e c o f bei g stil us d as nv rtible). The Obje t the epistle was to cure the dissensio n an d insubordinatio n that had ro e o ut in C o C an d h c had led to b k n the rinthian hurch, w i h e o o o f so a s The d n o w the d p siti n me bl mele s presbyters. ate e er s to r on e to g n ally a signed the lette , what app ar be

de o d - h d E s e 9 5 9 6 A D. T e 2 n a quate gr un s, is . pi tl Of C men so d o m n o n au thor le t, calle , is a h ily by an unk w , probably w ritten at Ro me in the ﬁrst hal f o f the second ce r ntu y. I na ius co e to C o r ve e in g t , nvert d hristianity c mpa ati ly lat e E uodius o of o c and was lif , succeeded as Bish p Anti h, e the r o f C o s u Ro e u nd r martyr d in a ena the li e m at m , e

ra an 1 1 - 1 1 H is n n n 0 5 A. D are o w r T j , . ge uine writi gs gene ally e d to con s s o f e e e es r en the co r e o f his h l i t s v n pistl , w itt in u s t o r o ro n o c to Ro m viz : j , , . las urney as a p is ner f m A ti h e, ro Sm r to E s the Ma nesian s the (f m y na) the phe ians, g , I 3 1 94 T HE N EW TESTAM ENT AND ITS W RITERS

ra l an s the Ro m s and fro m ro s to the P de s T l i , an , ( T a ) hila lphian , the Sm rnaean s Po car s o Of Sm r y , and ly p, Bi h p y na. With e ce o n o f E i e to the Ro n r s the x pti the p stl ma s, which elate ’ almo st en tirely to the author s expecte d and eagerly- desired rdo m e is e de o of do c r and marty , th se ep tl s al with questi ns t ine ’ e as se r r disciplin e. They mph i the eality o f Ch ists humanity in o s o o ce c er o f n o i to c . e c uda sin Opp iti n D ti r r ( . p d un e J g en e nc es an d o r the hree o d ecc es s c o rder t d i , enf ce t f l l ia ti al s o res er and e on in the i res Of C rc (bi h p , p byt , d ac ) nte ts hu h unity. P ar fo r n a B o o f Sm rn orn olyc p , ma y ye rs ish p y a, was b

- d u fe red m r o m o 6 9 7 0 A . D. an in c o u ab ut , s f a tyrd that ity ab t

- h i - 1 5 5 1 5 A D . e he was n h F m hi 6 . e r. ro s , w n his eig ty sixth y a d c e I renre us we ea rn e b earer o f is ipl , , l that he had b en a the “ o s e o n and he had no t o e e u Ap tl J h , that nly b n ta ght by a os e and v in e rco se m ha p tl s, li ed familiar int ur with any t t ” “ had n C h s o ece e o n tme see ri t, but had als r iv d his app i nt in ” ro o e as o the C rc o f Sm Asia f m Ap stl s bish p in hu h yrna. The o nly e xta nt writing bearing his name that is generally e d to e i e is his e s e to P i n s admitt be g nu n pi tl the h lippia , wh c was r en e r o r - ﬁve e r e o re his de h i h w itt n a ly f ty y a s b f at , ’ o h o f u s o n ab ut t e ti me Ignati martyrdom . It is of c s iderable e o es n ot s o r orro in l ngth , but d di play much iginality, b w g “ ” e ro the ac o f the Lor and H is o s e larg ly f m te hing d ap tl s, as well as fro m the l ette rs o f Ignatius and Cl em ent ; and the c e o f t n as o f e o s s e his hief valu his wri i g, his lif , c n i t d in n er a achm en t an a e of n o co fl c u sw ving tt , in g tra siti n and n i t, to the e u e os d o g n in ap to li c tra iti n .

b - TO h - o oc e Of St P Bam a aS . . t is well kn wn ass iat aul there was as cribe d by the early Church Fathers an epistle co n in n e is er - d in ta i g tw nty chapters. It v y anti Ju aistic s r t m a n h d sm o an d s e pi i , aint i ing t at Ju ai , in its utward vi ibl ’ fo rm had n o t rece d the d e n c o an d Go d s , ive ivin sa ti n, that co n t h d e on ed o th e r s n vena a nev r bel g t e J ws . It bet ay a m e r ec ac n n ce w s r e and r o n es i p f t quai ta ith Jewi h it s ce em i , an d t n den c to n d e r ﬂ n e or es for c a e y i ulg in t i i g all g i , whi h re s o n s e ec se o f G o c n n o f the a , as w ll as b au its n sti mag ifyi g i n ne r m ean ing o f Scripture at the expens e o f its h istorical r m e w o r m o t cr cs ss n to k o Ge e f a k , s iti a ig it an un n wn ntil a o r o f e an dr a w r n in the e nn n the seco d uth Al x i , iti g b gi i g Of n

1 96 TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

or Pe er o r P o r b om a o r J m es or by t , by hilip, y Th s a , by ’ ohn o r e w o r o er o f the Lo rd sc es an d J Matth , any th s di ipl , a Aristien an d the E de o the d s c o f the Lo rd wh t l r J hn, i iples , sa Fo r did n o t h o d et so ch y. I think t at I w ul g mu pro fit fro m the co ntents o f bo oks as fro m the utterances of a ” d n er r living and abi i g vo ice. Th e is o o m fo r differen ce Of o o n to the orrec es o f fere ce b E se s pini as c tn s this in n y u biu . ' T he Didache or Tea ching of the (Twelve) Apostles is the name o f the wo rk re ferred to by Eusebius and others — “ ” C lem ent o f Al ex andria even quo ting it as Scripture ; n o MS o f it was n o n 1 8 7 3 Br en n ius dis but . k w till , when y co vered at C o nstantino ple a do cument containing both it and the e s e o f C em e and r e er o er pi tl s l nt Ba nabas, and s v al th Th rs r Of an cient writin gs. e fi t pa t it is founded upo n a still “ ” earlier wo rk called The T wo Ways (probably o f Jewish o r n er o sed e e of rn b s igi , and p haps als u in the pistl Ba a a ), w c s e s o r the o f hteo u es e and the hi h t f th way rig sn s and lif , wa o f u n h o s es an d ea so m er the y rig te u n s d th , ewhat aft h f mes The se o d a ' manner Of t e Epistle o Ja . c n p rt is o f a mo re ecc s s c l r an d e a e to r er s i le ia ti a natu e, r l t s p ay and fa t ng, t he two c m n s and r o s c s e o ft c Office sa ra e t , va i u la s s ea hers and rers the C ch co or o tO bea in hur , ncluding with an exh tati n n d fo r the s con d co n o f the Lo watch a d be rea y e mi g rd. It was probably co mpo sed in the en d of the fi rst or the beginning o f he se o ce n r t c nd tu y. id s n oso er m en on ed Aris t e , an Athenia phil ph , is ti by n d o er as o r o f o s o o E usebius a ther writ s the auth a fam u Ap l gy. It is o nly withi n the last few years that the w ork has been ’ i co ered S i c r n s a on St C er n e s o n d s v , in a yr a t a l ti , in . ath i , M u t — Sin ai which has led to the iden tifi catio n of a po rtio n o f the o r n od e e r C r s n o ce The Li e igi al , emb i d in an a ly h i tia r man ( f w s ddre se to the E m of Barlaam and J osapha t) . It a a s d peror

H dri n l 1 7 - 1 38 o r to his successer Anto ninus P s who a a ( , iu ( l o c led H r a o r o ss to o h an d ma s fe was a s al ad i n), p ibly b t , it y a ly

- D is the de e n C ris i n be ass ign ed to 1 2 5 1 4 0 A . . It Ol st xta t h t a o o o f dr us c r en o the Ap l gy. That "ua at , whi h was w itt ab ut s me m e l n d sco vered but o on ro is a ti , is stil u i a qu tati f m it who e h o f the or en E use . giv by bius, sp aks hig ly w k mo u s Gn o s c ec o r t u h at Basilides , a fa ti sp ulat , a g t Alexandria in the reign o f Hadrian ( 1 1 7 - 1 38 We APPE NDIX A 1 9 ? l e arn fro m Eus ebius that he wro te twe n ty- fo ur bo ok s o n the G o s e and ha s c o r ef a o n o f he e p l , t t a sati fa t y r ut ti his r sy was co der e o r o o f his p ro duced by Agrippa C asto r. A nsi abl p ti n ’ writings has been found in H ippolytus Refu tation of all H eresies reco e in 1 8 4 2 and u sh in 1 8 5 1 and , ver d p bli ed ; vai ie us acco u nts o f his teachi ng are fo und I n the writi ngs o f d E i han iu H e C e e o f e r re ae an s . l m nt Al xand ia, I n us, p p s ee m to e o to e m r c all the u ve se o n e an s hav s ught b a e ni r in pl , o f c s s C r s the c re an d to h e ro e do wn whi h Je u h i t is ent , av b k n in the attempt to combine Egyptian speculatio n with Scripture ” n truth . Altho ugh his nam e is o ften men tio ned by subseque t r ers o u nde n o c o o o f m o c o e m n en w it , he f d s h l i p rtan e, his nly i t d c e be n so n s o re is ipl i g his I id . V n o e Gn o c ho e f m ec d o f ale tinus, an th r sti , w s a e lipse that

B s il . D n d a ides c me to Rom e rom E o 1 38 A . a , a (f the ast) ab ut , her for o r e rs Fro m ae s H o taughtt e ab utthi tyy a . Iren u , ipp lytus, an d o r c e wr who d c ss e we e rn the an i nt iters is u his vi ws, l a that he devised an elaborate system of Aeons or emanations ro m the De o r n the Pleroma or e se for c f ity, f mi g univ r , whi h ro essed to ﬁn d su o r the New e m n a o he p f pp t in T sta e t, lth ugh he wa o hr n s in reality m re o f a Pythago rean than a C istia . M the son o f B ho Of S o e in Po s arcion , a is p in p ntu , but co mm u n c ed on o t o f r e m G os c ex i at acc un his he esy, b ca e a n ti

° l eader Of great i n ﬂuen ce at Ro me an d el s ewhere (about 1 4 0 with fo llow ers in many lan ds n o t o nly in his o wn day but fo r e er o s erw r H e s et the s amen g n ati n aft a ds. New Te t t in o os o to the Old and e r sen d Go d o f pp iti n , r p e te the Redemptio n as essentially differen t fro m and superior to the Go d C re o T o u his u r os es h ram o e Of ati n . s it p p e f ed a G sp l fo r m se f b m ed Go s e o f L e Of the hi l , eing a utilat p l uk ; and rest o f the canon ical boo ks he o nly ack no wledged ten epistl es P c ud n H e re and the P s o E s e to Of aul (ex l i g b ws a t ral pi tl s), w c he e the n o f A osto lic n His o o s are to hi h gav ame p o . pini n ea ed m n ro er E i hanius who be l rn ai ly f m T tullian and p p , d r o o to r u e h un e t k ef t t em . The Ep istle t o Diognetus is on e o f the noblest and m ost impress ive Of early Christian apol ogies in style an d m ” treat ent. It is addressed by an anonym ous autho r to an ed e P an in n w r to n r r ucat d ag a s e his i qui ies about Ch istianity. Whil e certainly n o t the w o rk o f Justin Martyr (to whom it 1 08 TH E N EW TE STAM ENT AND ITS W RITERS

so me m e ee n t r bu ed ro ab da es ro m the has ti s b a t i t ), it p b ly t f seco n r The o n MS co ce u . t nd t y. ly n aining it (o f the thi rteenth century) was destroyed in Strassburg in 1 8 7 0 duri ng the

F co - Ger War co n s s h h e r . we e s o r c s ran man It si t Of t lv t apt , the s two are ro o f c e r d e an d ear but la t p bably a mu h lat at , b tr ce e r a o r n a s Of an Al xand i n igi . ustin Mart r e Sam r o f G ree des ce J y , a nativ Of a ia, k nt, a er n tr ed r o s o rm o f Gree h o so ft havi g i va i u f s k p il phy, es ec P o n m was co n er ed to C s an and p ially lat is , v t hri ti ity ec d o ca e at Ro m e E n d he e ze o es s a e se re . b am its al us a v t , ph u , l w Of his nume ro us writi ngs there hav e been pres erved to us (bes id es a fe w fragments) t wo Ap ologies addressed to Ro man E m ero in n c o n the C r s fe and Dia lo ue p rs vi di ati Of h i tian li , a g with Tr ho J e w be n the cco n o f a d s c o n yp , a , i g a u t i ussi at E in c s n o u to o e t es the phesus, whi h Ju ti s ght pr v hat J us was C r s H e ro e e o re the d e of co ce r h i t. w t b f mid l the se nd ntu y, and was r red o t 1 5 A D ma ty ab u 6 . . Ta ian n a e o f so o m was eac e r o f r e o r c t , a tiv Me p ta ia, a t h h t i , we erse G reek er re an d o so h H e c me ll v d in lit atu phil p y . a

nde r he in ue n f ar r in Ro m o u 1 2 . t ce o e 6 A. D u ﬂ Justin M ty ab t , and became a zeal o us m ember o f the Church ; but o n his re rn to E a er the de e l o tu the ast, ft ath Of Justin , he f l int Gno s m o f ec ar an d re rde as the stici a p uli type, was ga d f f he cs mo e ro s o er ath e r o t E ncratites (asceti ). A ng num u th wo rks he wro te an Apol o gy under the name o f an Address to the Greeks w c is s e ta n H rmo o f , hi h till x nt, and a ki d Of a ny h h Diatessaron t e Four Go spels whi ch e called . A en ras n h o so r o f the sc o o o f th ago , an Athe ian p il phe h l 1 A D s on re emb n P to n s s ro e o o 7 6 . . la i t , w t an Ap l gy ( ) tr gly s li g o f us tiu and re e o n the Resur ec o n o o f that J , a t atis r ti , b th d r b e c r which are extant and exhibit consi e a le int lle tual po we . M li B o o f S r man o f e en c e to , ish p a dis, a wid inﬂu e in

s or ro o n e e o f ec . o A ia Min , w te a gr at vari ty subj ts Am ng his wo rks (o n ly fragm ents o f whi ch hav e co m e do w n to us) was an Apo l ogy addressed to Marcus Aurelius ( 1 7 7 des igned to av ert the risin g persecuti on by vindicating the o f h r s character t e Ch istian .

The hi u o of n o c 1 7 1 - 1 8 4 a op l s, Bish p A ti h ( was pro liﬁc write r ; but the o nly undoubted work o f his that has co e to is A olo ia ad Autol cum t r m down us his p g y , in h ee

200 TH E N E W TESTAM ENT AND ITS WRITERS

n u mero us an d vari ed. H e was a k ee n and abl e con t ro

vers ialis t s ro n - o c en and e en ded (with a t ng a ti gn sti b t), d f C r s a g n e e s e ere cs h i ti nity a ai st h ath n , J ws, and h ti . H e esi us an ecc es s c l r er of the seco cen ur g pp , l ia ti a w it nd t y, o f e w s de ce and m em e o f the C rc erus e m J i h s nt a b r hu h at J al , u b s ed o 1 8 0 oo s o fMemoria ls r m en s p li h (ab ut five b k , f ag t o f e esi us h d which have been preserved by Eusebius . H g pp a pre vio usly visite d Ro me (where he appears to have spen t m n ears n C o r n on the an d m n r a y y ), taki g i th way, aki g inqui y to h o d o n d n E u e h t e s o c r . cco r to e as Ap t li t a iti A i g s bius , ” o n e er ere the e do c r ne f u d v ywh sam t i . C lementine H omilies (in Greek) an d Recognitions (in a Lati n tran slatio n by Ru finu s) are based o n the same original ’ an cco o f Peter s d s co rs e to the ea he are in ( a unt i u s h t n), but o res e w e d f e ren H omilies e n s ron s me p cts id ly i f t, the b i g t gly E o e in o c r the Reco nitions o re ed fo r the bi nit d t ine, g m adapt f e con s s t r e o f r m c use o the o rtho dox . Th y i la g ly a o anti sto ry o f the travels o f C l ement (the future Bish op o f Ro m e) e n ce o n Pe er ose s o se reco d and in att nda t , wh di c ur s he r s ; they were evidently designed to exalt Pete r as the apostle o f the G es the e e e o f P who is o er referred entil at xp ns aul , c v tly to d r h o f m o The H omilies are un e t e name Si n Magus. we m er an d are dd es ed m e the e d o f t nty in nu b , a r s to Ja s , h a Jewish Christianity the Recognitions deriv e their name from ’ the ro d n in cce s o o o e ro er an d he s fin i g su s i n his l st m th r, b th s, f r e re e o rm the o m os on ma be ned athe . In th irp s nt f , c p iti s y assig h e n f h n n o f h c n r to t e d o t e seco d o r beginni g the t ird e tu y.

Hi t us 1 7 0- 2 35 b earer o f re ae s pp oly ( a I n u , and a Ro n e c es s c o f re m o a ce da e er ma c l ia ti g at i p rt n in his y, wh th re te r o r s o ro t n oo s o f c the as p sby bi h p, w e ma y b k , whi h H eres ies P r o f p rincipal extant is his Refu tation of all . a t wo r d r the o f Philoso ahoumena se to this k, un e name g , u d be i 2 M o n e o f a r e d to Or e n 1 8 4 S. c tt ibut ig n, but a ntaini g sev n the ten books o f which the wo rk is composed was discovered o n o n o s and n ow en era c o e e to M u t Ath , it is g lly a kn wl dg d Its c e v e fo r u s es have been w ritte n by H ippo lytus. hi f alu li in the acco unt which it giv es o f the Gnostic heresies o f the hen u rce H i o eco n d ce r r c em to ea o . s ntu y, t a ing th h t s s pp lytus was u te n s e to i es o f S r w re he ltima ly ba i h d the m n a dinia, he is belie v ed to have pe rished. A PPENDIX A 201

- a o f C e me n le and a Origen ( 1 8 6 2 5 4 pupil l t A x . an o f mm e se ndu r and e rn n e er e de m i n i st y l a i g, x t d a wi ﬂ nce his ec re in e n r e s e C ae ar a in ue by l tu s Al xa d ia, J ru al m, s e ,

A e s and e e e e . H e o s o m o s r er th n , ls wh r was a m t v lu in u w it o n c eo o ca o o l ec s. E e bibli al , th l gi l, and phil s phica subj t us bius te lls us that he kept more than seven sh orthand writers m o ed s de as m co s an d se er e e pl y , be i s any pyi ts, v al femal i t H is e o n es de C o n ar e caligraph s s . chi f w rk exta t (b i s mme t i s an d H o milies in Latin tran slation s) is his E ight B ooks against f C r s H is fe o n o f els u efen ce o . e C s, in d h i tianity li was In he Dec n er ec o be d struggl e an d hardship . t ia p s uti n un er d d d so o a er ard e e o r re an . w nt t tu , ie n ft w s at Tyr m ian B s o o f C aes r C o o 2 30 Fir il , i h p a ea in appad cia (ab ut e d H is o 2 7 0 was an intimate fri n o f Origen . nly r n e n to C r h c re w iti g xta t is a letter yp ian , w i h has been p f n n serv ed in the fo rm o a Latin tra slatio . C an e e cher o f r e o C e was yp ri , a w althy t a h t ric in arthag , f 2 4 co ert d 2 4 6 A. D . c o o 8 nv e , be ame bish p his native city in d s f er d m r om 2 5 8 A D H is n o r o r 2 4 9 an e . . , u f a tyrd exta t w ks n co ns ist o f con tro versial treatises a d ofﬁcial letters .

E se s 2 6 0- 339 B s o o f C a r en d u biu ( i h p esarea, and f i “ o f C o s n Gre e F er n tanti e the at, has been call d the ath “ o f C c H o r Or e the F ther o f c hur h ist y, as ig n a Bibli al

C c sm . H is E cclesiastical H istor in ten oo e riti i y, b ks, giv s f 2 an cco o th r s c do o 4 . D a unt e Ch i tian Chur h wn t 3 A . Although Eusebius himself seems to have been o f a rather ea men c an d o o n h c his w k judg t, the fa ts qu tati s wit whi h H isto ry teems make it a m ine o f w ealth for the historian an d h r f h m ua e r t e c c. O o e o s o t a a e iti his t r w rk , the s v l bl his Gos el Pre ara tion Gos el Demons tration o o f an p p and p , b th o o e c n ture ap l g ti a .

A n s 2 9 9 - 37 3 s o of e r an d tha asiu ( Bi h p Al xand ia, the c m o o f o r odo the e r C o ro ers ha pi n th xy in gr at A ian, nt v y, wro e u e o e r re c o f o ct t n m r us l tte s and t atises, hieﬂy a d rinal n u re at . Cyril of Jeru salem (3 1 5 - 38 6 app o in ted bi shop o f his n ative city in le ft a large number o f catecheti cal dres se h c are e for the nfo o e e d ad s, w i h valuabl i rmati n th y yi l re r n the do ctr an d i o f the e r rc ga di g ine the r tual a ly Chu h . A o li C n i n cc c m cel p sto c o st tutio s , an e lesiasti al is lany in TH E NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS W RITERS

e oo no t ear er re en fo m the m ddle ight b ks , li (in its p s t r ) than i o f he t fo urth century. Gregory Nazianzen (32 9 - 38 9 son o f a bisho p o f

Nazian zus was his o e o - s uden at en s , in y uth a f ll w t t Ath with B s the Gr a an d the E m eror n o n e m c a il e t p Julia . At ti e Ar h s o o f C o no he mo fo r e r an d bi h p nstanti ple, was fa us l a ning e o en c e i n er o f o ra o ns e es l qu e, and l ft an mme se numb ti , pistl , and o e s p m . Basil the Grea o r in C aesare C o c 330 t , b n a ( appad ia) in

A. D . ccee ed E se in s o r c in 37 0 d , su d u bius the bi h p i , and die f 3 7 9 . o re e e o o f ch c e he was A man g at l vati n ara t r, the m a o r o f o r o f theo o c a e l e an . uth any w ks a l gi al n tur , stil xt t Gregory of Nys sa ( 3 32 - 3 9 5 yo u nger brother o f l e d a o o s o n s in E stern C u rc an d was Basi , h l v ri us p iti the a h h, o ne o f m o s o e fe n e o f the o r o o f h i n the t p w rful de d rs th d x ait , o o o to r and o l r His wr n s are m e r pp siti n A ius Ap l ina is . iti g nu

o ne and nc e o h con ro ers e e c o . , i lud b t t v ial and xeg ti al w rks B i hanins s o o f C o n S am in C s p p , Bi h p nsta tia ( al is) ypru 36 4 03 D hi or 7 s e 3 . s c ( publi h d in 7 7 A . hief w k Pa na ii um e n e fere er s es H e was ( ), d ali g with ighty dif nt h e i . m o fo r arn an d de c en in fa us his le ing piety, but was ﬁ i t f v ew his s m r o r H e r o e e a e c . b eadth i , and tat nts ften ina cu ate w ro o ed e as st ngly ppos to the scho o l o f Orig n . Chrys os tom (golden- mo uthed) was bo rn at Antio ch in 34 7 l n nd D . o ed P r r f nst o i 39 a A . c o C o 7 , app int at ia h antin p e , m d t c e o f r re 4 . H e as he r e a ty 07 A D. w t g ea st prea h r the G ee C r and e t m n the o r k hu ch , l f a y valuable writings, m st m r n f w i po ta t o hich are his H omilies . J erome o r Hieronymus (34 1 - 4 2 0 the greatest sc o r o f the La C rch the ran s a or o f the h la tin hu , and t l t

e e r e o f c and ecc e s ca o s . Vulgat , l ft a va i ty bibli al l sia ti l w rk ’

I n his er e he e in rm s ce n e r Be e . lat lif dw lt a he it ll , a thleh m o 5 4 D w s co ve e in u d 3 A . a Au ust in n . g e, b r N mi ia in , n rt d, a ter sto rm o ro e o f n 38 6 an d f a y y uth , by Amb s Mila in , r ric o 39 6 H e ec e B o o f H o in o . b am ish p ipp , N th Af a, ab ut m o d eo o o f his o wn er m es an d ul ed the th l gy and lat ti , left m ero wr n s mo s mo o f ch are Con es nu us iti g , the t fa us whi his f H d 4 0 o f sions an d Cit o God. e 3 y f die in , during the siege h ls H ippo by t e Vanda .

2 04 APPENDIX B

5 - f n h . n r C J o . 1 5 t x 3 1 33 a d a ( ) . h xxi wi Matt. x vi M k — ’ xiv 2 7 - 2 9 the two a er c eco rd Pe er s o as s . l tt (whi h r t b t ) s u n e n o n o f the orme ass e here pplyi g an xpla ati f r p ag , w “ e us s to S m o Pe er S m o son o f o hn o ves J s aith i n t , i n, J , l t ” tho u m e more than these ? h me n . d n m f . 1 3 e c a d we er ( 6 ) C Matt. iv a lt in Cap au — w 2 n x. 1 5 re r n a ern aum with Luke I V. 3 a d ith fe e ce to C p ’ as f r s n r a fav o ured scene o C h i t s mi ist y. 8 Pro h s C f. . xv . 6 7 6 es o u o Matt x i , p y unt , th u h s r c ee 4 C rist : who is he that t u k th ? with Luke x xii . 6 the latte r explai n i ng the fo rm er by the additio n they blind olded him — o ev e l de en de n rra e f alth ugh id nt y an in p nt a tiv . 5 in he f t f . 8 C 6 o o h . 1 8 ( ) . Matt. xxvi . ( light J n v , x ’ 3 3 L e i 2 — the o rm ref r to C r s s r ) with uk xxii . f er er ing h i t t ial e o J ewish Council o n c r e o f blas he m the er b f re the a ha g p y, latt to His r l e o re Pila te on a c r o f sedition the cc s t ia b f ha ge , a u a o n e c c s e co r e s o d n to the b ti in a h a r p n i g tri unal . f 1 — 7 o . he er 9 C . t . 1 6 t ( ) Mat xxvi . with J hn xviii latt e xplai n i ng indire ctly ho w Peter should hav e bee n re cogn ised “ “ — s h r n the p orch viz. because he was tanding at t e doo “ w o the o e i c was o n un o ith ut until th r d sciple, whi h kn w t

- es en o ut and s a o her e the the high pri t, w t p ke unt that k pt ”

oo r and ro in Pe r. d , b ught te w o ar vi. 1 . 4 No w he s e r ( 1 0) C f. M k 3 ith J hn vi t pas o v ’ — was at hand the latter supplyi ng an e xplanati o n of the great numbe r o f peopl e in the neighbo urho o d at the me ti . f h hn 4 5 . and o 4 1 1 C o vi. 8 u 1 0 w L e . ( ) . J n , ith k ix J i , with re fe re n ce to the con n ecti o n o f Philip an d Andrew wi th Beths a ida in the ne i hb r d o which the miracle was , g ou hoo f wrou ht g . d’ 1 2 C f. o n 1 7 w ere o ur Lo r s 3 6 2 . 1 ( ) J h iii . , vi . , xx ( h A scen si o n is in directly referred to) with the actual reco rd o f

e in Lu e x - that ev nt k x i v . 5 0 5 3 LIST OF BOOKS ON TH E SUBJ E CT

Wes t ott B o I ntroduction to the Four Gos els . 1 03. 6d. c ( ish p) , p N e 1 03 d h on o t e w Testament. . 6 T e Can f h .

o ohn . 3 6d les J 9 . . On the Epist f St. E o he H eb ws 1 48 On the p is tle t t re . .

h t nd the Four Gos els 6s . Dal e The Living C ris a p . — F rr r e n The Messa es o the B ooks cours es and o e a a ( D a ), g f Dis N t s 4 e 1 s . o nthe N ew Testam n t .

F r Dr S no tica l L ectures . 2 o s . 1 5 . ras e ( . y p V l s

The N ew Tes ta men t Scri tures . 7s . 6d. Charteris ( Prof. p i t 1 88 Canon ci y. . ’ E i les o Pau l H o son 3 L e and st t. . 68 C onyb eare an d w if p f S . d ment tudies 3 6 . ode Dr N ew Testa S . 7 G t ( . 6d n t s . . Studies o he M tles . 7 l o a 1 28 6d s P u l. . . The Ep i t es f St.

I ntrodu ction to the N ew Testa me 2s 6 d rcus nt . d o s Pro . . . D ( f Ma ), he N ew Testament 8 l r I n troduction to t . 9 . Sa mo n ( P o f.

or on Rev E vidences the Genuin eness o the Gos el. N t ( . of f p

7s . 6 d.

t n e e n The E istle to the Corinthians . C r c S a l y (D a ) , p With iti al d r o n 1 o e an e . 88 N t s Diss tati s . f o o mm nta o Ga ti n s L o B Co e r n la a . l 2 s ight t ( ish p) , y . Commentar on Colossians and Philemo 1 2 n . s y .

Commentar on Phili ian s. 1 2 y pp s . B iblica l E ssa s 1 2 3 y . . N otes on the E istles o St Pau l 1 2 p f . . 8 .

F n d The E istles o the A stl P u o e a 2 5 . 6d i lay p f p l. . eson The S iritua l D evelo men t o t Pa u l 5 3 . Math p p f S . .

er Pa u l. Sketch o Develo o t 6 ment his Doc ri . s d ne . Sabati f p f 7 . e rc de o n H se au lines l P ac or P . s . al y (A h ) , 206 LIST OF BOOKS ON THE SU BJECT

B un Re ture v. . Scri Coi ncidences . 68 l t ( J J p . Ca mbrid e B ible or Schools and Co le 1 m l es . 8 o fro 1 8 to g f g V ls . . 8 6d 4 . .

’ Ea ositor s B ible— on N ew Testamen t 0 o 6 e c 2 s . d m . V ls . 7 . a h . ’ ’ S eaker s Commentar uden Ed on N ew es men p y. St t s iti . T ta t .

2 o s 6d. e c . V ls . 7 . a h m r o n H ow we o r B ib h P e t ou le. l s S yt ( at s ) , g . f n H ow to Stud the N ew Testa ment l ord e . 3 Vo . 38 6d A (D a ) , y ls . . ea ch he ek N Tes m n 4 o 2 T Gre ew ta e t . £ . . V ls thorshi o o urth o el s 6 nd A u the F G 8 . d Sa ay p f sp . . Leadi I o the s 6 e nder B o n deas Go els . 8 Al xa ( ish p) , g f p . o r I ntroductio n to the na ic G e s d G . S t os l . 8 6 . l ag ( D y p p 7 . I roduct on to the P u li 1 2 8 nt i a ne Ep istles . .

I ntroduction to the Catho lic E is tles 1 8 0 . 6d p . .

I ntroduction to the J ohann ine E is tles . 1 09 6d p . . ’ ’

h s Gos el 48 . Pu ed in r e St J o n . . C k R ith . p ( blish T. T la s

o f e - nd oks se ries Bibl Class H a bo . ) The F a li 3s m c v Ed our E v n e sts . d o n R . . . 6 Th s o ( g . Pa u l the The a l a E istles o St. to ss oni ns Gal Jo e Pro . atians w tt ( f p f _ , , s d e c 2 o . . 6 . . and Roma ns . V ls 7 a h We ss Ma nua l I ntroduction to the N ew Testament 2 o s i of . V l .

s 6d e c . 7 . . a h le E les o t Pa u l to e E Hort Pro gomena to the p ist f S . th p hesians a the Roma 3 nd ns . 6 .

Interna tiona l C ritica l Co mmenta r in cours e o f u l c o n y p b i ati . l 1 8 . er vo 2 p . es tco and H or I ntroduction to the N ew Testa men t in the W tt t , 1 8 d na l Greek 0 . 6 . Origi .

e n rod ud ion to the Criticism o the New Testament Scriven r I t f . 2 o 32 8 V ls . .

i i m . n C utlines o Textual Crit c s . 4 s . 6d Hamm o d ( . O f e w T a ment 2 s . . Warﬁeld Textua l C riticis m of th Ne es t . 6d

' R R . C L K L I M I D E din bu r h. P r i n ted b . I E y AR , , g

HE NEW TESTAMENT AND ITS WRITERS

M‘ LYM Rev. . . C ONT D D. By the J A , . , Aberdeen .

N ew an d E n r ed Ed on . ec ted fo r the us o f e la g iti Sp ially adap e Teach rs . m v e 8 o c o 2 88 . Pri 38 . ce d. n D y , l th , pp 6 et .

‘ r M l mo n has re e m M . C y t p par d hi self fo r his task by wid e reading an d min ute study l E en ce Of o un u men and un n n o rm n e r vid s d j dg t ab da t i f atio ap p a s o n every page . The t e B ri is h W ekly. “ The o rk is o ne Of muc ue I t e c o r and ro u h w h val . displays wid s h la ship a tho g c uaintanc e the ub ec re ed and fo r m k n ﬁcu n s q with s j ts t at , that ability a i g dif lt thi g " alaIn is so e r b and et s o r m c e r e . he Scots an whi h d si a l y a .

v lume la r e o n 8vo cloth i n one o cr w lt to . I , g , , g p Price 7 8 . 6d.

THE HIST ORY OF THE RE FORMATION OF RE LIGION \VITHIN THE REALM OF SC OTLAN D

VVItlT T E N BY J O H N KN O X

E D ITE D FOR PO PULAR USE BY J THR E G C . C . . U I , "

S E COND ED IT I ON

WI TH NOTES SUMMAR GLOSSAR I N E X AND I T -SI X , Y, Y, D , F F Y I LL USTRA TI ON S

The ta sk is one which Carlyle desired to see ac co mplished nearly thi rty years ago whe n he wro te in o n e o f the least kn own o f his wo rks It is really a lo ss to E nglish ’ nd e en to un er er ure Kno and r n e n ere n m re e v iv sal lit at , that x s hasty st a g ly i t sti g, i p ssiv nd peculiar boo k has n o t been rend ere d far mo re extensively legible to serio u ’ ’ n s he c s be n re n s e M r i e It e to e r. u r nankind at la ge tha hith rto t a e . will i t sti g if G th ie s ’ r can re o re ohn Knox H o r to the ace Of o no ur once e b ut eem s abo u st J s ist y pl h it h ld , s — o n to e o mon Sco c c . Glas o wH erald. g hav l st, a g ttish lassi s g “ ' r Gu r e is to be e r co n r u e on em to o u r e Kno s M . th i h a tily g at lat d this att pt p p la is x ’ H o r c has ne er efore een re en e d in uc an r c e fo rm . Anc ist y , whi h v b b p s t s h att a tiv vhile a mere ac q uain tance with this editio n will d o ubtless bri ng d elight to many rs who o u ne er ha e ck e the ork in e e n u e ma n uc ea de w ld v v ta l d w a l ss pl asi g g is , it y i d o m e o f them to study it seriously in that archaic and genuine form fo r the elnc idatio r ” m — A L MI in The Bookman in s o uc D Y E NG . f which David La g did h . . H F